IN-PROCESS APPLICATION

PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Manual Code: D291M000UD

Single Diameter
Diameters with Switching
Two Diameters Simultaneously
Two Diameters and Taper
Active Positioning
Active Centering

Passive Positioning
Passive Centering
Length
Check of flat surfaces-EXAR

P7tool_D291M000UD_44.doc 26/11/09
 Post Process Single Diameter
Post Process Diameters with Switching

Two Post Process Diameters Simultaneously

Two Post Process Diameters and Taper

Gap & Crash

 This product is in conformity with the EMC requirements as for the directive
2004/108/CE
This product is intended to operate in industrial locations; it is not intended for connections to a
public mains network but is intended to be connected to a power network supplied from a high
or medium voltage transformer.

This product is in conformity with the “Electrical Safety” requirements as for the directive
2006/95/EC

SAFETY WARNINGS
Follow the grinder manufacturer’s safety procedures.
Follow all safety procedures at the gauge system location.
There are NO Customer serviceable parts inside the P7ME. Always call technical service

MANUFACTURER: Marposs S.p.A.

ADDRESS: Via Saliceto 13, Bentivoglio (BO) Italia
www.marposs.com

SYSTEM SOFTWARE: V4.4

P7 SISTEM - MODEL:
HARDWARE CODE:
SOFTWARE CODE:

MANUAL CODE NO.: D291M000UD

DATE OF ISSUE: May 31, 2005
EDITION: (04) November 2008
ISSUED BY: Marposs S.p.A. , Via Saliceto 13, Bentivoglio (BO) Italia

MARPOSS S.p.A. does not take on the obligation of notifying possible further changes to the product.
The descriptions reported in this book do not authorize any tampering by non-authorized personnel.
The warranty on the equipment will decay if such tampering is found.

© Copyright Marposs S.p.A., 2001-2008

P7tool_D291M000UD_44.doc 26/11/09
About the Directive 2002/95/EC “RoHS” regulating the presence of certain hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment

The Member States of the European Community are in the process of completing the
national reception and enforcement of the Directive 2002/95/EC regulating the presence of
certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

The Directive explicitly excludes from its scope of application finished products such as
those manufactured and sold by Marposs. It is still indeed a widely debated matter whether
the complete removal of the regulated substances could affect the reliability of the product.

Marposs shares in the social responsibility of continuously supporting every form of

innovation that reduces or minimizes any risk of adverse impact on human health and the
environment.

Marposs is therefore voluntarily pursuing the progressive removal of the regulated

substances from our products. Marposs will do so with the clear understanding that any
improvement achieved on the protection of health and the environment should not come as a
compromise for the quality and reliability of our products.

Marposs will put the greatest consideration in any initiative that our Customers
undertake with the purpose of reducing the environmental risk. Our commitment is the
support of their effort developing products that be of the highest quality and reliability.

– Programming Manual 5
6 – Programming Manual
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................. 15
1.1. Programming Manual ................................................................................................. 15
1.2. Conventions................................................................................................................15
1.2.1. Interface between Gauge and user .................................................................................. 15
1.2.2. Programming Manual ....................................................................................................... 15
2. FRONT PANEL ................................................................................................................ 16
2.1. Keys............................................................................................................................ 18
2.2. Keypad ....................................................................................................................... 18
2.3. Combination of keys ................................................................................................... 19
2.4. Panel test / Viewing the software version ................................................................... 19
3. HOW THE SYSTEM IS ORGANIZED .............................................................................. 20
3.1. Operating modes ........................................................................................................ 20
3.2. Software structure ...................................................................................................... 20
3.2.1. Folders.............................................................................................................................. 21
3.2.2. Sub-folders ....................................................................................................................... 22
3.2.3. Pages................................................................................................................................ 22
3.2.4. Messages and info section ............................................................................................... 23
3.3. Password Control ....................................................................................................... 24
4. USE .................................................................................................................................. 25
4.1. F keys ......................................................................................................................... 25
4.1.1. Function Keys ................................................................................................................... 25
4.1.2. Hot keys............................................................................................................................ 25
4.1.3. Defining the HOT keys...................................................................................................... 26
4.1.4. Deleting the HOT keys...................................................................................................... 26
4.2. Getting around the Program ....................................................................................... 27
4.2.1. Cursor controls ................................................................................................................. 27
4.2.2. Hot keys............................................................................................................................ 28
4.2.3. Defining the HOME key .................................................................................................... 28
4.3. If you get lost .............................................................................................................. 28
5. HOW TO PROGRAM ....................................................................................................... 29
5.1. Selecting predefined values........................................................................................ 29
5.2. Programming numerical values .................................................................................. 29
5.3. Undoing programming ................................................................................................ 29
5.4. Resetting all the programmed and acquired values.................................................... 30
6. DEFINING THE SETS ...................................................................................................... 31
6.1. How to define the sets at the first power-on................................................................ 31
6.2. How to define a new Set............................................................................................. 33
6.3. How to select an already defined Set ......................................................................... 34
6.4. How to delete a set ..................................................................................................... 35
7. ENABLING THE P.I.P. WINDOW (PICTURE IN PICTURE) ............................................ 36

8. CONFIGURATION OF APPLICATION ................................................................ 38

– Programming Manual 7
 8.1. External Info Menu map .................................................................................... 38

8.2. Heads connection ........................................................................................ 39

8.2.1. Amplifier Modules connection ............................................................................... 39
8.2.2. Viewing of Measuring Head Parameters .......................................................................... 41
8.2.2.1. Viewing of Arm Ratio value....................................................................................................... 42
8.2.2.2. Viewing of Zeroing Range ........................................................................................................ 43
8.2.2.3. Viewing of Retraction Parameters ............................................................................................ 43
8.2.2.4. Viewing of Zero Shift................................................................................................................. 43
8.2.2.5. Information about correction / Viewing data of the measure card with DSP ............................ 44

8.3. Measuring Heads Information .......................................................................... 45

8.3.1. Measuring head parameterization ......................................................................... 45
8.3.1.1. Measurement viewing resolution ..................................................................................... 46
8.3.1.2. Field Center value..................................................................................................................... 46
8.3.1.3. Adjusting the transducer drive frequency (Frequency shift) ..................................................... 47

8.4. Machine data ..................................................................................................... 48

8.4.1. Selecting unit of measure and language ................................................................. 49
8.4.1.1. Selecting unit of measure (micron/inch) ................................................................................... 49
8.4.1.2. Selecting the language ............................................................................................................. 49

8.4.2. Software Codes .................................................................................................... 50

8.4.3. Password ................................................................................................................ 50
8.4.3.1. Definition of User’s Password................................................................................................... 50
8.4.3.2. Changing the User’s Password ................................................................................................ 52
8.4.3.3. Eliminating the User’s Password .............................................................................................. 52
8.4.4. Info on hardware unit .............................................................................................. 54
8.4.5. Programming the communications ........................................................................... 55

9. INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ...................................................................................... 56

9.1. I/O test .............................................................................................................. 57

9.1.1. I/O Byte test ...................................................................................................................... 58
9.1.2. I/O bits test........................................................................................................................ 60
9.1.3. Field Bus test .................................................................................................................... 62
9.2. Acquiring Measuring Heads Parameters ........................................................ 65
9.2.1. Arm Ratio self-learning ........................................................................................... 66
9.2.2. Retraction Threshold self-learning .......................................................................... 70
9.2.3. Setting in coupling ................................................................................................... 72
9.2.4. Electric Sensitivity Constant self-learning ................................................................ 74
9.3. Programming Analog Output .......................................................................... 75
9.4. Set-Up environment in Automatic mode ............................................................. 77
9.4.1. Mechanical zero-setting .................................................................................................... 78
9.4.2. Electric zero-setting .......................................................................................................... 79
9.4.3. Arm ratio self-learning....................................................................................................... 80
9.4.4. Retraction thresholds self-learning ................................................................................... 81
9.4.5. Set-up in coupling ............................................................................................................. 81

8 – Programming Manual
 9.4.6. Surface processing parameters........................................................................................ 82

10. PROGRAMMING APPLICATIONS ...................................................................... 83

10.1. Diameter / Diameters with Switching .................................................... 84

10.1.1. Diameter Menu Map ................................................................................................. 85
10.1.1.1. Measurement optional functions (Options)................................................................................86
10.1.2. Programming of measurement parameters ...................................................................... 87
10.1.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition ..........................................................................................88
10.1.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming ..............................................................................................91
10.1.3. Measurement equation ..................................................................................................... 94
10.1.4. Integral measurement....................................................................................................... 95
10.1.4.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ..................................................................................97
10.1.5. Control Points .......................................................................................................... 99
10.1.5.1. Programming control points value.............................................................................................99
10.1.5.2. Removing control points ..........................................................................................................100
10.1.5.3. Restoring control points...........................................................................................................100
10.1.6. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 101
10.1.6.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters .........................................................105
10.1.6.2. Elaboration for cams .........................................................................................................106
10.1.6.3. Elaboration for trilobal parts ..............................................................................................107
10.1.6.4. Adjusting the surface processing ............................................................................................108
10.1.7. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option).................................................................... 109
10.1.8. Ovality (Option) ...................................................................................................... 110
10.1.8.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ................................................................................111
10.1.9. Stock removal speed control (Adaptive Cycle) (Option) ......................................... 112
10.1.9.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ................................................................................113
10.1.10. Stock Removal (Option) ...................................................................................... 114
10.1.10.1. Removal of a constant amount of stock (ABSOLUTE) ...........................................................115
10.1.10.2. Removal of a percentage amount of stock (PERCENTAGE) .................................................115
10.1.11. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)......................................... 116
10.1.12. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option) ............................................ 117
10.1.13. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)........................................................................... 119
10.1.14. PP/IP coupling – Taper compensation (Option) .................................................. 123
10.1.14.1. Taper compensation................................................................................................................124

10.2. Two Diameters Simultaneously ................................................................... 126

10.2.1. Two Diameters Simultaneously Menu Map ............................................................ 127
10.2.1.1. Measurement optional functions (Options)..............................................................................128
10.2.2. Programming of measurement parameters .................................................................... 129
10.2.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition ........................................................................................130
10.2.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming ............................................................................................133
10.2.3. Measurement equation ................................................................................................... 135
10.2.4. Integral measurement..................................................................................................... 136
10.2.4.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ................................................................................137
10.2.5. Control Points ........................................................................................................ 140
10.2.5.1. Programming control points value...........................................................................................140
10.2.5.2. Removing control points ..........................................................................................................141

– Programming Manual 9
 10.2.5.3. Restoring control points .......................................................................................................... 141
10.2.6. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 142
10.2.6.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters ......................................................... 146
10.2.6.2. Adjusting the surface processing............................................................................................ 148
10.2.7. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option) .................................................................... 149
10.2.8. Ovality (Option) ..................................................................................................... 150
10.2.8.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ............................................................................... 151
10.2.9. Stock Removal Speed Control (Adaptive Cycle) (Option) ....................................... 152
10.2.9.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ............................................................................... 153
10.2.10. Stock Removal (Option) ...................................................................................... 154
10.2.10.1. Removal of a constant amount of stock (ABSOLUTE)........................................................... 155
10.2.10.2. Removal of a percentage amount of stock (PERCENTAGE)................................................. 155
10.2.11. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option) ......................................... 156
10.2.12. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option) ............................................ 157
10.2.13. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option) ........................................................................... 159
10.2.14. PP/IP coupling (Option)........................................................................................ 163

10.3. Two Diameters & Taper .............................................................................. 164

10.3.1. Two Diameters & Taper Menu Map ........................................................................ 165
10.3.1.1. Measurement optional functions (Options)............................................................................. 166
10.3.2. Programming of measurement parameters .................................................................... 167
10.3.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition ....................................................................................... 168
10.3.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming ........................................................................................... 171
10.3.3. Measurement equation ................................................................................................... 173
10.3.4. Integral measurement ..................................................................................................... 174
10.3.4.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ............................................................................... 175
10.3.5. Taper ....................................................................................................................... 178
10.3.5.1. Area controls relevant to taper measurement (Option) .................................................. 178
10.3.5.2. Programming/changing value of Taper control points ............................................................ 179
10.3.5.3. Removing control points ......................................................................................................... 179
10.3.5.4. Restoring control points .......................................................................................................... 179
10.3.6. Control Points ......................................................................................................... 180
10.3.6.1. Programming control points value .......................................................................................... 180
10.3.6.2. Removing control points ......................................................................................................... 181
10.3.6.3. Restoring control points .......................................................................................................... 181
10.3.7. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 182
10.3.7.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters ......................................................... 186
10.3.7.2. Adjusting the surface processing............................................................................................ 188
10.3.8. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option) .................................................................... 189
10.3.9. Ovality (Option) ...................................................................................................... 190
10.3.9.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ............................................................................... 191
10.3.10. Stock Removal Speed Control (Adaptive Cycle) (Option).................................... 192
10.3.10.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ............................................................................... 193
10.3.11. Stock Removal (Option) ...................................................................................... 194
10.3.11.1. Removal of a constant amount of stock (ABSOLUTE)........................................................... 195
10.3.11.2. Removal of a percentage amount of stock (PERCENTAGE)................................................. 195
10.3.12. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option) ......................................... 196

10 – Programming Manual
 10.3.13. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option) ............................................ 197
10.3.14. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)........................................................................... 199
10.3.15. PP/IP coupling (Option) ....................................................................................... 203

10.4. Active positioning ....................................................................................... 204

10.4.1. Active Positioning Menu Map ............................................................................... 205
10.4.2. Programming of measurement parameters .................................................................... 206
10.4.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition ........................................................................................207
10.4.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming ............................................................................................208
10.4.3. Control points ......................................................................................................... 210
10.4.3.1. Programming/changing Control points value ..........................................................................210
10.4.3.2. Removing control points ..........................................................................................................211
10.4.3.3. Restoring control points...........................................................................................................212
10.4.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 213
10.4.4.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters .........................................................216
10.4.4.2. Adjusting the surface processing ............................................................................................218

10.5. Active centering ........................................................................................ 219

10.5.1. Active centering Menu Map ................................................................................... 220
10.5.2. Programming of measurement parameters .................................................................... 221
10.5.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition ........................................................................................222
10.5.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming ............................................................................................223
10.5.3. Control points ........................................................................................................ 225
10.5.3.1. Programming/changing control points value ...........................................................................225
10.5.3.2. Removing control points ..........................................................................................................226
10.5.3.3. Restoring control points...........................................................................................................227
10.5.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 228
10.5.4.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters .........................................................231
10.5.4.2. Adjusting the surface processing ............................................................................................233

10.6. Passive positioning ................................................................................... 234

10.6.1. Passive Positioning Menu Map ............................................................................ 235
10.6.2. Programming of measurement parameters .................................................................... 236
10.6.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition ........................................................................................237
10.6.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming ............................................................................................239
10.6.3. Positioning Over Range values ...................................................................................... 241
10.6.4. Integral measurement..................................................................................................... 242
10.6.4.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ................................................................................243
10.6.5. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 244
10.6.5.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters .........................................................247
10.6.5.2. Adjusting the surface processing ............................................................................................248
10.6.6. PP/IP coupling (Option)........................................................................................... 249

10.7. Passive centering ..................................................................................... 250

10.7.1. Passive Centering Menu Map ............................................................................... 251
10.7.2. Measuring head parameters programming..................................................................... 252
10.7.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition ........................................................................................253
10.7.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming ............................................................................................254

– Programming Manual 11
 10.7.3. Centering Over Range values......................................................................................... 257
10.7.4. Integral measurement ..................................................................................................... 258
10.7.4.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ............................................................................... 259
10.7.5. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 260
10.7.5.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters ........................................................ 263
10.7.5.2. Adjusting the surface processing............................................................................................ 265
10.7.6. PP/IP coupling (Option)........................................................................................... 266

10.8. Length (Thickness) .................................................................................... 267

10.8.1. Length Menu Map .................................................................................................. 268
10.8.1.1. Measurement optional functions (Options)............................................................................. 269
10.8.2. Programming of measurement parameters .................................................................... 270
10.8.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition ....................................................................................... 271
10.8.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming ........................................................................................... 272
10.8.3. Measurement equation ................................................................................................... 274
10.8.4. Integral measurement ..................................................................................................... 275
10.8.4.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ............................................................................... 276
10.8.5. Control Points ......................................................................................................... 278
10.8.5.1. Programming control points value .......................................................................................... 278
10.8.5.2. Removing control points ......................................................................................................... 279
10.8.5.3. Restoring control points .......................................................................................................... 279
10.8.6. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 280
10.8.6.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters ........................................................ 284
10.8.6.2. Adjusting the surface processing............................................................................................ 285
10.8.7. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option) .................................................................... 286
10.8.8. Stock Removal (Option) ......................................................................................... 287
10.8.8.1. Removal of a constant amount of stock (ABSOLUTE)........................................................... 288
10.8.8.2. Removal of a percentage amount of stock (PERCENTAGE)................................................. 288
10.8.9. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option) ............................................ 289
10.8.10. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option) ............................................ 290
10.8.11. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option) ........................................................................... 292
10.9. Check of flat surfaces - EXAR ................................................................... 296
10.9.1. Exar Menu Map .................................................................................................... 297
10.9.1.1. Measurement Options ............................................................................................................ 298
10.9.2. Programming of measurement parameters .................................................................... 299
10.9.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition ....................................................................................... 300
10.9.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming ........................................................................................... 301
10.9.3. Measurement synchronization mode programming ........................................................ 303
10.9.4. Measurement type programming .................................................................................... 304
10.9.5. Control Points ......................................................................................................... 305
10.9.5.1. Programming control points value .......................................................................................... 305
10.9.5.2. Removing control points ......................................................................................................... 306
10.9.5.3. Restoring control points .......................................................................................................... 306
10.9.6. Stock Removal (Option) ......................................................................................... 307
10.9.6.1. Removal of a constant amount of stock (ABSOLUTE)........................................................... 308
10.9.6.2. Removal of a percentage amount of stock (PERCENTAGE)................................................. 308
10.9.7. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option) ............................................ 309
10.9.8. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)................................................ 310

12 – Programming Manual
 10.9.9. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option) .............................................................................. 312

10.10. Post Process diameter / P.P. Diameters with Switching ........................ 316
10.10.1. Post Process Diameter Menu Map ..................................................................... 317
10.10.1.1. Measurement optional functions (Options) .............................................................................318
10.10.2. Programming of measurement parameters................................................................. 319
10.10.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition ........................................................................................320
10.10.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming ............................................................................................321
10.10.3. Integral measurement ................................................................................................. 323
10.10.3.1. Parameters of the integral measurement................................................................................324
10.10.4. Control Points ..................................................................................................... 326
10.10.4.1. Programming control points value...........................................................................................326
10.10.4.2. Removing control points..........................................................................................................327
10.10.4.3. Restoring control points...........................................................................................................327
10.10.4.4. Selecting the color of the control LEDs (color display)............................................................327
10.10.5. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .............................................. 328
10.10.5.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters .........................................................331
10.10.5.2. Adjusting the surface processing ............................................................................................333
10.10.6. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option)................................................................. 334
10.10.7. Ovality (Option) .................................................................................................. 336
10.10.7.1. Parameters of the integral measurement................................................................................337
10.10.8. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)........................................................................... 338
10.10.9. PP/IP coupling (Option) ....................................................................................... 340

10.11. Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously .............................................. 341

10.11.1. Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously Menu Map .................................... 342
10.11.1.1. Measurement optional functions (Options) .............................................................................343
10.11.2. Programming of measurement parameters................................................................. 344
10.11.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition ........................................................................................345
10.11.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming ............................................................................................346
10.11.3. Integral measurement ................................................................................................. 349
10.11.3.1. Parameters of the integral measurement................................................................................350
10.11.4. Control Points ..................................................................................................... 352
10.11.4.1. Programming control points value...........................................................................................352
10.11.4.2. Removing control points..........................................................................................................353
10.11.4.3. Restoring control points...........................................................................................................353
10.11.4.4. Selecting the color of the control LEDs (color display)............................................................353
10.11.5. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .............................................. 354
10.11.5.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters .........................................................357
10.11.5.2. Adjusting the surface processing ............................................................................................359
10.11.6. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option)................................................................. 360
10.11.7. Ovality (Option) .................................................................................................. 361
10.11.7.1. Parameters of the integral measurement................................................................................362
10.11.8. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)........................................................................... 363
10.11.9. PP/IP coupling (Option) ....................................................................................... 365

10.12. Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper ........................................................ 366

10.12.1. Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper Menu Map ............................................... 367

– Programming Manual 13
 10.12.1.1. Measurement optional functions (Options)............................................................................. 368
10.12.2. Programming of measurement parameters ................................................................. 369
10.12.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition ....................................................................................... 370
10.12.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming ........................................................................................... 371
10.12.3. Integral measurement.................................................................................................. 373
10.12.3.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ............................................................................... 374
10.12.4. Taper .................................................................................................................... 376
10.12.4.1. Programming/changing value of Taper control points............................................................ 376
10.12.4.2. Removing control points ......................................................................................................... 377
10.12.4.3. Restoring control points .......................................................................................................... 377
10.12.5. Control Points ..................................................................................................... 378
10.12.5.1. Programming control points value .......................................................................................... 378
10.12.5.2. Removing control points ......................................................................................................... 379
10.12.5.3. Restoring control points .......................................................................................................... 379
10.12.5.4. Selecting the color of the control LEDs (color display)........................................................... 379
10.12.6. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) ............................................... 380

10.12.6.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters ....................................................... 383

10.12.6.2. Adjusting the surface processing............................................................................................ 385
10.12.7. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option)................................................................. 386
10.12.8. Ovality (Option) .................................................................................................. 387
10.12.8.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ............................................................................... 388
10.12.9. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option) ........................................................................... 389
10.12.10. PP/IP coupling (Option)........................................................................................ 391
11. GAP & CRASH CONTROL PROGRAMMING ................................................ 392
11.1. Hardware setup .......................................................................................... 393
11.2. Software setup ............................................................................................. 397
11.2.1. GAP control programming ................................................................................... 399
11.2.2. CRASH control programming .............................................................................. 401
12. DIAGNOSTICS ........................................................................................................... 402
12.1. Fatal errors at power-on........................................................................................ 404
12.2. Calling Marposs Service ....................................................................................... 405

14 – Programming Manual
1. INTRODUCTION
Gauge computer used to control the grinding cycle. It can be customized to a variety
of applications and measuring heads. Marposs gauge can control and integrate touch
probes and ultrasonic microphones in order to monitor air gap and crash protection.
The gauge processes the signals coming from the measuring head(s) and/or the
various sensors and informs the machine’s logic system about the measurement
conditions. There are up to 7 outputs (controls) for changing feed rates and when the
zero size of the workpiece is reached to retract the grinding wheel.
Optional features include TIR, Ovality, Remspeed and Stock Removal.

1.1. Programming Manual

This guide is customized to the grinding machine on which the gauge is installed and
describes its specific measurement application.
This guide was written for the gauge system programmer. It will also be useful for
plant personnel who must perform maintenance and for assistance technicians.
This guide describes the following gauge programming functions:
Viewing measuring head(s) configuration.
Programming the measurement application.
Programming the measurement options.
Programming the grinding cycle control points.

1.2. Conventions
Conventions are standard methods of representing components or functions.

1.2.1. Interface between Gauge and user

The gauge software uses graphics and/or icons to show the various functions and
make comprehension and use easy and intuitive.
Other conventions used in this program are:
Numbers or text inside a dotted line can be changed.
Icons or text that appear as a phantom image (or grayed out) cannot be selected
on that page or are not available for the application and its options.

1.2.2. Programming Manual

In order to make this guide easy to use, several typographical conventions were
chosen:
Folders, sub-folders and page names are in Italics.
Numbers or choices that can be changed are within quotes; i.e. “100 µm".
Front panel keys or software buttons are shown using the current icon.
Section title references within the text are in bold.
Names of operator functions are followed by their icon.

– Programming Manual Introduction 15

2. FRONT PANEL
The front panel allows the programmer to customize the gauge system to a specific
measurement application. The keypad is used to access the various program pages
Three types of front panel are available:
Standard panel (in local or remote version)
3HE 19" panel (in remote version only)
3HE ½19" panel (in remote version only)
The function of the two panels is similar, they differ just in the keys arrangement.

Standard panel

F keys Manual/Automatic
key

Display Keypad

Hot key menu Shift key

F keys

16 Conventions – Programming Manual

 3HE 19" front panel

Manual/Automatic
F keys key

Display Keypad

Hot key menu NOT enabled key

F keys
Shift key

3HE ½19" front panel

Manual/Automatic
key Shift key
NOT enabled key
Hot key
Keypad
menu

F keys Display F keys

– Programming Manual Front Panel 17

2.1. Keys

ICON NAME FUNCTION

F1 to F6 keys can be used in two ways: as Hot keys or as

Function keys. Hot keys are shortcuts for moving through
F Keys the various pages and can be assigned by the operator
using the keypad, see section 4.1.2, page 25. Function
keys are predefined to do a one task on page.
Hot Key Display the Hot keys on the screen and removes them.
Menu
Automatic Switch the gauge system between Automatic and Manual
Manual modes.
Key used with other keys (see section 2.3 “Combination
Shift Shift of keys” page 19).

------------- NOT enabled key

2.2. Keypad

ICON NAME FUNCTION

Return the program to the Home page. The Home page

Home can be defined using the keypad, see section 4.2.3
“Defining the HOME key”, page 28.
View the software version number at power up and test
? ? the panel (see section 2.4 on page 19).

Arrows Move the cursor around the screen.

Move the cursor through data groups on page. Used with

TAB the Shift key to choose the Wheel/Cycle, see section 6
page 31.
Move up one level of the program. During a programming
Esc session aborts all changes made.
Enter data. Move down one level of the program.
Enter Enter

Decrease data values one digit at a time (with autorepeat

function).
Minus
In case of predefined data, allow scrolling parameters or
icons to view the desired one.

18 Keys – Programming Manual

 ICON NAME FUNCTION
Increase data values one digit at a time (with autorepeat
function).
Plus
In case of predefined data, allow scrolling parameters or
icons to view the desired one.

2.3. Combination of keys

COMBINATION OF KEYS FUNCTION

Shift In Manual mode enable the Wheel/Cycle selection.

+
Upon programming they abort all the changes made
Shift
+ before confirmation.
Upon programming these key disable/restore (with the
Shift Enter last programmed value) the selected data, for the data
+
allowing for it.
Enable P.I.P. window (Picture In Picture) on display
Shift
+ (see section 7 on page 36).

2.4. Panel test / Viewing the software version

?
Hold down the key at the system power-on: the following appears:

SOFTWARE VERSION Software version

Firm:4.1A (example)

<F1> For keyboard test

<F2> For display test
<Escape> To continue

<F1> Press to test the keyboard (follow the directions appearing on

display)

<F2> Press to test the display (follow the directions appearing on display).
A sequence of five pages is displayed (three pages in the basic colors
RGB for color display, a black page and a white page for the b/w display)
to carry out a visual check of the display efficiency.

<Escape> Press to continue.

– Programming Manual Front Panel 19

3. HOW THE SYSTEM IS ORGANIZED

3.1. Operating modes

The operating modes are: Manual and Automatic.
The active operating mode is indicated at the bottom right.
Examples:

Manual Automatic
operation operation

The operating mode is selected either with the dedicated key , or through signals
from the machine’s logic.

3.2. Software structure

The Software is divided into folders. Similar functions are grouped into sub-folders.
Related sub-folders are contained in folders. Each matter takes one or more pages of
a sub-folder.

20 Operating modes – Programming Manual

3.2.1. Folders
The following folders are available:

FOLDER NAME ICON FUNCTION MODE

Viewing Show measurement value, zero conditions and

the application programming.

General Give access to the pages for zero adjustments

Adjustments and modification of control points value.

Utilities Access the following environments:

- measuring head setup (mechanical
zeroing),
- electrical zeroing,
- zero adjustment,
- viewing control points;
- viewing measurement damping for
interrupted surfaces,
- viewing the measurement;
- zeroing summary,
- viewing the programmed data.

Programming Give access to the environment where the

specific measuring cycle is parameterized.

Inputs & Outputs Allow to select the I/O’s involved in the bit test
function and to access the arm ratio and
retraction value self acquisition functions (if
available).

External Info Allow viewing the current configuration for the

specific application.

Note: The Programming, Inputs & Outputs and External Info folders are
described in this manual, while the other folders are described in the
“Operator Guide“.

– Programming Manual How the sYstem is organized 21

 The highlighted icon indicates the current folder. The message in the lower left
corresponds to the highlighted icon (current folder).

Folders (Manual mode)

Current folder
highlighted

Name of
highlighted folder

3.2.2. Sub-folders
The sub-folders are the second level of the software structure and contain pages with
similar functions.
Enter
Use or to highlight the sub-folder icon and press to access. The
message in the lower left is the name of the highlighted sub-folder.

Selected Sub-folders
sub-folder

Name of selected
sub-folder

3.2.3. Pages
The pages are the third level of the software structure. Each contains a separate
function with information and function keys to perform that task.
Each page has three sections:
An icon at the top indicating the page function.
Function information in the middle including function keys.
Messages and information along the bottom.

22 Software structure – Programming Manual

 Example:
Page icon

Page data Function Keys

Messages &
Information

The example above shows the page for programming a single diameter.

3.2.4. Messages and info section

1 4 5 6

2 3 7

ICON NAME FUNCTION

Either the name of the highlighted icon or button or

1 Message
instructions on which button to press.

Currently selected workpiece number. The software

2 Part number
can handle up to 16 different workpieces.

Currently selected cycle number. The can handle up

3 Cycle number
to 16 different cycles.

A graphical representation of the programmed

Measurement
4 application
application. In this case “Single inside diameter
measurement ”.

Data display The Operator is viewing data.

5
Data entry The Operator is changing data.

– Programming Manual How the sYstem is organized 23

 6 In-process Indication of the process control shown on display.

Manual
7 Mode
Automatic

3.3. Password Control

The pages for programming/changing data are protected by password.
There are two password levels:
System Password (access to system data). Password always active that allows
access to confidential data (Marposs or Technical
Personnel).
User’s Password (access to application data). Password that can be either
programmed or disabled by the Operator (see 8.4.3
“Password ” page 50).
Enter
When the password is requested, if you press without having typed the password
or after typing a wrong password, the data can be only read.

24 Password Control – Programming Manual

4. USE

4.1. F keys

to keys on the front panel can be used either as Function keys or Hot keys.
Note: Function keys have an F number in the upper left corner of the icon.
Function key Hot key
F number

4.1.1. Function Keys

Function keys are only available on a specified page. They are predefined to do a
specific task on that page and cannot be changed.

Function Keys

Note: Function keys are available only after the page is selected. To select the
Enter
page, press .

4.1.2. Hot keys

These are shortcuts to any page of the program at any moment and are defined by
the operator via keypad. This allows customization of the gauge system to specific
needs or preferences. Six Hot keys are available in Automatic mode and another six
in Manual mode. For instructions on how to define these keys, see section 4.1.3,
page 26.
Hot keys are available at the folder, sub-folder or page level as shown below. Press

to view the Hot keys currently defined. These are examples of typical hot key
definitions.

– Programming Manual Use 25

 folder

sub-folder

page

4.1.3. Defining the HOT keys

1. Get to the desired page using the menu maps. Highlight the page icon.
2. Press and hold the desired “F#” key down until the icon is no longer highlighted,
about 5 seconds.
3. Release “F#”: the Hot Key is now defined.

4.1.4. Deleting the HOT keys

1. With the hot key to be deleted, call out the page currently stored.

2. Press to highlight the page icon.

26 F keys – Programming Manual

 3. Press and hold the desired “F#” key down until the icon is no longer highlighted,
about 5 seconds.
4. Release “F#”: the Hot Key is deleted.

4.2. Getting around the Program

There are three ways of moving through the program:
1. Using the cursor controls.
2. Shortcuts via the Hot Keys.
3. Home key to the default screen.

4.2.1. Cursor controls

The and keys move the cursor at the same level between folders, sub-
folders or pages.

The keys move the cursor around on page:

or move the cursor clockwise.

or move the cursor counter clockwise.

Enter
The key moves the program down one level.

The key moves the program up one level.

Enter
With a folder icon highlighted, press to move to the sub-folder level.
Enter
With a sub-folder icon highlighted, press to move to the page level.
Referring to the appropriate menu map select the path to the desired page.

Example:

Press to go to the program top level, then press

to select the icon of the desired folder.

Enter
Press to go to the sub-folder or second level of the
program.
Press to highlight the icon of the desired sub-folder.

– Programming Manual Use 27

 Enter
Press to go to the page level of the program.

If there are more pages on at the same level, press to

Enter
highlight the icon of the page. Press to access the
page.

4.2.2. Hot keys

To use the shortcuts method of getting around the program:

1. Turn on Hot key menu by pressing .

2. Press the F1 - F6 hot key associated with the desired page icon.

4.2.3. Defining the HOME key

The Home key defines a Home Page or default screen. A Home Page is available in
both Manual and Automatic modes. When power is turned on the Manual Home Page
is shown.
The operator defines the Home key:
1. Go to the desired page, see menu maps. The page icon should be highlighted.

2. Press and hold down until the icon is not highlighted, about 5 seconds.

3. Release , the Home Page for the current mode is now defined.

4.3. If you get lost

Press .

Press as many times as needed to reach the folder level of the program. Then
refer to the menu map for the path to the desired page or use a Hot key shortcut.

28 If you get lost – Programming Manual

5. HOW TO PROGRAM
Programmable parameters are within dotted lines.

5.1. Selecting predefined values

The values that can be given to some parameters are selected from a predefined list
(numerical value or icon).

1. Use or to highlight the desired parameter.

2. Press or to scroll through the values or icons available to the desired

one.
Enter
3. Press to confirm.

5.2. Programming numerical values

There are two methods to program a numerical value.

Method 1

1. Use or to highlight the numerical value.

2. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

Enter
3. Press , the value has been entered.

Method 2
Enter
1. Use or to highlight the number and press .

2. Press to highlight the digit that needs changing.

3. Press or to increase or decrease that digit.

4. Press to highlight the next digit, then press or to increase or

decrease that digit. Repeat for each digit.
Enter
5. Press , the numerical value has been entered.

5.3. Undoing programming

While holding down press to reset the values.

– Programming Manual How to program 29

5.4. Resetting all the programmed and acquired values

!
Beware !!
The execution of this operation will delete all the programmed sets (part/cycle)
and the acquired values of retraction and arm ratio of all the measuring heads.

1. Hold down the key at the system power-on: the following appears:

<ENTER> TO RESET ALL DATA

<ESCAPE> TO CONTINUE

Enter
2. Press to reset all data.

3. Press to annul the operation.

30 Resetting all the programmed and acquired values – Programming Manual

6. DEFINING THE SETS
The work data are associated to a Set number: each Set is defined by the
combination of two numbers, each one programmable from 1 to 16, totaling 256
combinations (256 Sets).
Set

1st Set no (1 - 16) 2nd Set no (1 - 16)

Each Set can be combined with different types of part and numbers of cycle based on
the programming of the machine logic.
From the Programming page it is possible to define new Sets, delete already
existing Sets and change the active Set selection.
From the other pages (Utility , Inputs&Outputs , External Info ) it is only
possible to change the active Set selection.

6.1. How to define the sets at the first power-on

In Manual mode and in Programming only.

1. At the first power-on, press until the main screen appears, then use to
highlight the Programming folder.

/……. /

Enter
2. Press to access the application programming display screen. In case of two
or more measurement applications, select the application to be combined with
the set:

Single Diameter Passive Positioning

– Programming Manual Defining the Sets 31

 3. Use to select the measurement application to be combined with the set,
Enter
then press . The Set selection folder is highlighted on the screen bottom.

Enter

Set selection

1st Set no. (Part) 2nd Set no. (Cycle)

/ /

Enter
4. If 1/1 is the Set to be defined, press , otherwise use / or /
Enter
to change the Set number, then press .

Enter
5. A dialog box is displayed with “Yes” highlighted: press .
6. The application programming page is displayed. Press .

Enter
7. Another dialog box is displayed with “Yes” highlighted: press . In this way the
initial Set is defined.
Note: If you select “No”, the new Set is not defined.

In the same way define the initial Part/Cycle for the other measurement application(s)
present in the configuration currently used.

32 How to define the sets at the first power-on – Programming Manual

6.2. How to define a new Set

• In Manual mode and in Programming only.

1. Access the Programming environment and go to the programming page
Shift
relevant to the desired type of application. While holding down press to
highlight the Set selection box.

Set selection

Enter
2. Use / or / to change the Set number, then press ; a dialog
Enter
box is displayed with “Yes” highlighted. Press .

Enter

Enter
3. If the new Set has the same programming of the previous one press , if it
Enter
has a different programming use to highlight “No” and press .

The new set is defined: now it can be programmed.

Note: In the new set definition stage, the default measuring head is the first one
available, and the nominal diameter is set equal to the value of the center
of the head range.

– Programming Manual Defining the Sets 33

6.3. How to select an already defined Set
Note: Select the Set prior to any programming procedure.

Manual mode only

Shift
1. While holding down press to highlight the Set selection box on bottom.
The current Set appears.

Note: If the Set selection box is not highlighted, it means that just one Set was
defined.

Set number

Application’s icon

2. Press or to view the required Set. The icon changes to indicate the
application combined with it.
Enter
3. Press to confirm the Set selection. The program automatically exits the
selection box and returns to the page.

34 How to select an already defined Set – Programming Manual

6.4. How to delete a set

• In Manual mode and in Programming only.

Shift
1. Access the Programming environment . While holding down press
to highlight the Set selection box.

Enter
2. Press or to view the Set to be deleted, then press to confirm the
selected Set.
Shift
3. Press + to highlight the Set selection box again.
Shift Enter
4. Press + to delete the selected Set. A dialog box is displayed with “Yes”
highlighted.

Enter
5. Press : the selected Set is deleted.

– Programming Manual Defining the Sets 35

7. ENABLING THE P.I.P. WINDOW (PICTURE IN PICTURE)
Shift
Press the + keys to make a P.I.P. (Picture In Picture) window appear on
display. The P.I.P. window views the main information relevant to each process
control present in the application.
P.I.P. window

The P.I.P. window allows simultaneously monitoring either different situations of a

same process control.
Examples:
Main display screen and P.I.P. window relevant to “In-Process” control

Viewing of machining
cycle

Programmed Data
viewing page.

How to select the type of P.I.P. window (information to be displayed)

Shift
• Press the + keys to highlight the window (a dashed line is displayed on
the window outline)

• Press or to select the type of P.I.P. window (information to be displayed):

it is possible to select one of the following windows:

Viewing of Mida probe control status (if present), GAP

control (if present), Crash control (if present), status of
measuring head retraction (if present), and error
indication.

Viewing of machining cycle (measurement value, status of

machining controls).

36 How to delete a set – Programming Manual

 Shift
• Press the + keys to confirm the selection.

How to move the P.I.P. window on the screen

Shift
• Press + to highlight the window (a dashed line is displayed on the window
outline).

• Press or to move the window to the desired position.

Shift
• Press the + keys to confirm the selection.

How to disable the P.I.P. window

Shift
• Press + to highlight the window (a dashed line is displayed on the window
outline).

• Press .

– Programming Manual Enabling the P.I.P. window (Picture In Picture) 37

8. CONFIGURATION OF APPLICATION
This section covers viewing the measuring heads(s) and application configuration and
what parameters need to be programmed.

8.1. External Info Menu map

A B C D E
External Info
FOLDERS

Request for:
System Password 1
User’s Password (if
active)

Heads Measuring Machine

connection heads info Data
SUBFOLDERS

2
PAGES

Amplifier modules Measuring head Measuring head World area Software codes
connection setup parameters Sec. 8.4.1, pag. 49 Sec. 8.4.2, pag. 50
Sec. 8.2.1, pag. 39 Sec. 8.3.1, pag. 45 Sec. 8.2.2, pag. 41

Password Hw Equipment info Comm. Progr.

Sec. 8.4.3, pag. 50 Sec. 8.4.4, pag 54 Sec. 8.4.5, pag. 55

5
View measuring head
parameters. Sec. 8.2.2, pag. 41
Arm Ratio Zeroing range Retraction
Getting around the program

Enter
move down to the next level. 6

move up one level.

Zero shift Corrections
move between folders, sub-folders or
pages on the same level.

38 External Info Menu map – Programming Manual

8.2. Heads connection
Enter
You are asked to type the System Password: press to access the data viewing
environment ( ).
These pages allow viewing of the hardware amplifier modules and measuring head(s)
configuration.

8.2.1. Amplifier Modules connection

Page A3 of the menu map “External Info Menu map ” (section 8.1, page 38).
This page shows the connections of the measuring head(s) to the amplifier modules
present on the CPU Measurement card. Each measurement card houses up to four
amplifier modules.
Flags indicating presence of amplifier
module/measuring head connection Name and icon of
measuring head

Amplifier modules the

measuring heads are
connected to

Number of transducers

Note: The F5 key is NOT enabled while viewing the data.

There may be up to three amplifier modules: each amplifier module corresponds to a

measuring head upon programming/viewing is identified as follows:

Measurement CPU Card Amplifier Modules

module 1: measuring head H1 (Sensors S1 – S2)
module 2: measuring head H2 (Sensors S3 – S4)
module 3: measuring head H3 (Sensors S5 – S6)
module 4: measuring head H4 (Sensors S7 – S8)

A measuring head can have one or two finger/sensors assemblies, if it has just one
assembly, then the second line of the module reads “--------------“.

– Programming Manual Configuration of Application 39

 F1, F2, F3, F4 correspond to the function keys found on the panel: press the
Enter
corresponding F# key or highlight the box with and press to view the
parameters of the measuring head connected to the selected amplifier module (see
8.2.2 “Viewing of Measuring Head Parameters” on page 41).
Module/head connection presence flags
The following indications on the amplifier module/transducer(s) connection line mean:
⌧ amplifier module present and measuring head connection enabled
amplifier module present but measuring head connection NOT enabled
No indication amplifier module absent.

Note: The measuring head connection can also be disabled without entering the
“System Password”; anyway the “User’s Password” must be entered if it was defined
(see 8.4.3.1 “Definition of User’s Password”, page 50).

To disable or enable the connection press until the folder is highlighted, then
Enter
press to define its status. The programmed sets, corresponding to the disabled
measuring head are disabled.

40 Heads connection – Programming Manual

8.2.2. Viewing of Measuring Head Parameters
Page A5 of the menu map “External Info Menu map ” (section 8.1, page 38).

This page shows the specific parameters of the measuring head (parameters defined
at the configuration level).

Head enabling
flag

Module number of hardware amplifier module the measuring head is connected

to. When the module number is highlighted, press or to call out the other
modules: if a module is not present, data and icons will be a grayed out image.
Type type of amplifier module (Standard, Standard Unimar, WR Unimar, Air
Gap, etc.).
Measurement Range maximum measurement range that can be viewed by
electronic unit.
Total Sensors number of finger /contact assemblies in measuring head.
Sensor type name of measuring head.
Typical application measurement application corresponding to measuring
head.
Enter
Arm ratio with the box highlighted, press to access the page viewing of the
arm ratio value.
T. Working Range (maximum range available with linearity error within
the maximum value specified for the transducer in use).
Enter
Zeroing Range with box highlighted, press to access the page viewing of
the admitted mechanical zeroing range.

Retraction an “X” is in the left hand box if configured. When the box is
Enter
highlighted, press to access the retraction information page.

– Programming Manual Configuration of Application 41

 Note – Application with “Thruvar” measuring head
In case of application with “Thruvar” measuring head (measuring head with
pneumatic retraction), the state of the “Retraction” box determines the following
situations:
Display of Self-learning of retraction threshold
retraction alarm (chapter 9.2.2, page 70)
NO in Automatic
NO
YES in Manual
YES
YES to be performed whenever the
in Manual and Automatic diameter (measurement range) is
changed

Zero Shift an “X” is in the left hand box if configured. When the box is
Enter
highlighted, press to access the page viewing of the maximum zero shift value
available.
Buffer an “X” is in the left hand box if the measuring head has a buffer circuit for
setting the arm ratio.
Corrections If not available for the configured measuring head this item will be
Enter
a phantom (grayed out) image. When the box is highlighted, press to
access the page viewing of the correction values.

8.2.2.1. Viewing of Arm Ratio value

Page C5 of the menu map “External Info Menu map ” (section 8.1, page 38).

Nominal Arm Ratio arm ratio value defined during the system configuration
stage.
Self-Learned Arm Ratio arm ratio value displayed following the Arm Ratio
Acquisition procedure (see chapter 9.2.1 on page 66).
Electrical sensitivity value of the electric sensitivity constant defined during the
system configuration stage (see chapter 9.2.4 on page 74).

42 Heads connection – Programming Manual

8.2.2.2. Viewing of Zeroing Range
Page D5 of the menu map “External Info Menu map ” (section 8.1, page 38).

“Zeroing alarm” Check Box

Check of zeroing executed NOT active
Check of zeroing executed active. When a cycle is requested, if measurement is
not zeroed, an alarm indication (Alarm 41) is displayed.

8.2.2.3. Viewing of Retraction Parameters

Page E5 of the menu map “External Info Menu map ” (section 8.1, page 38).
If the measuring head has been configured for retraction, this page will be available
for viewing.

Retraction Type type of configured retraction: Serial (24 Volt), Parallel (12 Volt),
1/3 (8 Volt), Pneumatic.
Retraction Range maximum retraction range (expressed in microns at the
contact).
Fall Speed the drop speed of the finger/contact assembly onto the workpiece.
Vibration Time time upon which the software delays the alarm output if a
transducer has lost the retraction condition, once the PLC has requested to verify
the retraction execution (e.g. for fast mechanical oscillations during the slide
movement).

8.2.2.4. Viewing of Zero Shift

Page D6 of the menu map “External Info Menu map ” (section 8.1, page 38).
If the measuring head has been configured for zero shift, this page will be available
for viewing.

– Programming Manual Configuration of Application 43

 The electric zero shift of the contact (meant as offset in relation to natural zero) is the
ability of the application (electronic unit + measuring head) of gauging parts of
different sizes provided they are included in the head work range.

8.2.2.5. Information about correction / Viewing data of the measure card with DSP
Page E6 of the menu map “External Info Menu map ” (section 8.1, page 38).
The content of the page is different in the case of application with measure card with
DSP (linearization of the measurement range) or without DSP.
(DSP = Digital Signal Processor)

Application with measure card without DSP Application with measure card with DSP
An “X” in the relevant box indicates that the corresponding function is enabled/valid.

Application with measure card without DSP

The thermal compensation values defined upon the application configuration are
displayed.
Application with measure card with DSP (linearization of the measurement range)
The thermal compensation values and the data relevant to the measure card with
DSP (measure card allowing the linearization of the measurement range) defined
upon the application configuration are displayed.

Thermal Correction the ability of the software to compensate for changes in the
measurement caused by temperature variations in the measuring head.

Linearity Correction the ability of the software to compensate for natural

measurement errors of the transducer in order to obtain in the whole measurement
range of the head, a viewing corresponding to the contact mechanical shift.

Presence of EEPROM = application

configured for “Masterless” application.

44 Heads connection – Programming Manual

8.3. Measuring Heads Information
Page B2 of the menu map “External Info Menu map ” (section 8.1, page 38).
You are asked to type the User’s Password (if active).
Enter
press to access the data view-only environment ( ).
Enter
type the password and press to program/change data ( ).

8.3.1. Measuring head parameterization

Page B3 of the menu map “External Info Menu map ” (section 8.1, page 38).
The measuring parameters that can be programmed are:
measuring head resolution
field center value (for the measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”).
adjusting the transducer drive frequency

Amplifier module
number
Measurement
viewing resolution

Adjusting the transducer

drive frequency Field center value

Module number of the amplifier module the measuring head is connected to.
With the module number highlighted, press or to call out the other
modules: if a module is not present, data and icons will be a grayed out image.
Type type of amplifier module (Standard, Standard Unimar, WR Unimar, Air
Gap, etc.).
Measurement range maximum measuring range that can be viewed by
electronic unit (± 200 µm / ± 500 µm / ± 1000 µm / ± 2000 µm).

– Programming Manual Configuration of Application 45

8.3.1.1. Measurement viewing resolution
The possibility of changing the measure display resolution depends on the
measurement range defined upon the application configuration stage.

Measurement range Resolution

µm inches µm inches
± 200 ± 0.008 1 / 0,1 / 0,01 4 0.00001 / 0.000001 / 0.0000001 4
± 500 ± 0.02 1 / 0,1 0.00001 / 0.000001
± 1000 ± 0.04 1 0.00001
± 2000 ± 0.08 1 0.00001
4 0,01 µm / 0.0000001” with suitable hardware/software configuration only.
Note: In the case of application with measure card with DSP (linearization of the
measurement range), for all the measurement ranges it is always possible
to select among the following values of display resolution: 1 / 0,1 / 0,01 µm
or corresponding values in inches.

To change (when permitted) the programming of this datum: press to highlight

Enter
the field, or to modify it, and then to confirm.

8.3.1.2. Field Center value

With measuring heads enabled for “zero shift” this is the central value of the total
measurement interval provided. Default value = 40.000 mm.

maximum diameter + minimum diameter

field center (mean diameter) =
2
The field center value is used by the electronic unit for the execution of zero shift for
the nominal values entered in the measuring cycles that must be included within the
zero shift range (see section 8.2.2.4).
Programming the field center value:
Enter
1. Press to highlight the default value, then press .

2. Press to highlight the first digit, then or to increase or decrease.

3. Repeat step 2 for each digit
Enter
4. After the value has been set, press .
Note: The field center must be programmed as millimeters even if all the other
numerical values are in inches.

46 Measuring Heads Information – Programming Manual

 Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to be
Enter
reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust values
(programmed or from BCD) as well.

8.3.1.3. Adjusting the transducer drive frequency (Frequency shift)

The value that can be programmed in the “Fine Tuning” range allows a fine
adjustment of the measurement transducer drive frequency: this aims at preventing
possible resonance phenomena with the drive frequency of other equipments.
This datum can be programmed with the values –1, 0 and +1. The transducer drive
frequency, based on the programming of this datum, is the following:

Fine Tuning Drive frequency

-1 7400 Hz
0 7500 Hz
+1 7600 Hz

To change the programming of this datum: press to highlight the field, or

Enter
to change, then to confirm.

– Programming Manual Configuration of Application 47

8.4. Machine data
Manual operating mode.
The Machine data concern the whole system, regardless the active (selected) control
process.

Select the External Info folder and press

Press to select the Machine Data sub-folder and

press .

Unit of measure and View software codes. Password definition. Hardware unit info.
language selection Section 8.4.2, Section 8.4.350, Section 8.4.4,
Section 8.4.1, page 50 page 50 page 54
page 49

Communications
programming
Section 8.4.5,
page 55

48 Machine data – Programming Manual

8.4.1. Selecting unit of measure and language
Language selection
field

Unit of measure
selection field

Press to reach the page.

8.4.1.1. Selecting unit of measure (micron/inch)

The System can accommodate the use of either measurement system based on the
application requirements.

1. Use to highlight the Unit of measure selection field.

2. Press to select the unit of measure (µm=micron or “=inch) and press .

3. Press . A question box will appear: press to confirm. The unit of

measure has been defined.

Note: The unit of measurement selected is also valid for the measurement
BCD/Binary output, if any, (BCD/Binary output of the measurement value
in µm or inches).

8.4.1.2. Selecting the language

The System can accommodate different switched languages for viewing messages
on display.

1. Use to highlight the Language selection field

2. Press to select the desired language (among the available ones), then
press .

3. Press . A question box will appear: press to confirm. The language has
been defined.

– Programming Manual Configuration of Application 49

8.4.2. Software Codes
This page lists all the software modules installed in the Gauge.

8.4.3. Password
There are two password levels (User’s Password and System Password) for
protecting the programming/changing of system or user’s data.
The System Password (access to system data) is always active and cannot be
disabled by the Operator (reserved to Marposs personnel or Technical personnel).
The User’s Password (access to application data) can be defined, changed or
deleted by the Operator.

Status of User’s Password

Password active
Password not active

When the System or User’s password is active, it is always possible to access the
data viewing by pressing , even if you don’t know the password.

8.4.3.1. Definition of User’s Password

Note: Once the password has been defined, it is not possible to access the
application data programming without entering that password.

1. Press to access the password definition page and highlight the icon
corresponding to the user’s password by pressing . Press .

50 Machine data – Programming Manual

 2. Press to highlight “Yes” and press . You are asked to enter the
password.

password
keys F1 ÷ F6

3. Type the password: up to 6 figures, corresponding to a combination of keys

÷ . Press .
4. You are asked to confirm the password typed: type the password again and
press .

password number

5. Press : the password has been defined.

Active User’s Password

– Programming Manual Configuration of Application 51

 6. Press to exit the password definition page.

8.4.3.2. Changing the User’s Password

Note: To be able to change the password you must know the current password.

1. Press to access the password definition page and highlight the icon
corresponding to the user’s password by pressing . Press .

2. Press to highlight “Yes” and press . You are asked to type the current
password. Type the password and press .

current password
(keys F1 ÷ F6)

3. Type the new password the proceed as indicated from step 3 to step 6 of
paragraph 8.4.3.1 ”Definition of User’s Password” on page 50.

8.4.3.3. Eliminating the User’s Password

Note: To be able to eliminate the user’s password you must know the current
password.

1. Press to access the password definition page and highlight the icon
corresponding to the user’s password by pressing . Press .

52 Machine data – Programming Manual

 2. Press to highlight “Yes” and press . You are asked to type the current
password. Type the password and press .

current password
(keys F1 ÷ F6)

3. Press twice.

4. Press to confirm the password deletion, then press to exit the

password definition page.

– Programming Manual Configuration of Application 53

8.4.4. Info on hardware unit
Thois page allows to verify the hardware unit of the system and to view the functional
characteristics of each card used.

No. of system slot

Card foreseen for the Card present in the

selected slot selected slot

Press to access the page.

Selection slot: press to highlight the field, press or to select the desired
slot number.

Information about the card.

Use to highlight the key and press .

Further information about the card present in the
selected slot is displayed (see example at the
right).

Information about the modules of the card

Use to highlight the key and press .

Information is shown about the modules fitted on
the measurement card present in the selected
slot (see example at the right).

Viewing of alarms at power on.

Use to highlight the key and press to

view the alarms, if any, that took place at the
system power on (see example at the right).

54 Machine data – Programming Manual

 Viewing of the last 20 alarm messages.

Press to highlight the key and press .

The last 20 alarm messages relevant to the
selected slot are displayed (see example to the
right).
When the system is switched off all the possible
alarm messages recorded are reset.

8.4.5. Programming the communications

Programming of the connections to external devices through serial connection or
Ethernet-type connection (through TCP/IP protocol).

This stage of programming shall be performed while installing the application; on this
matter consult the "Installation Manual” relevant to the application in use.

– Programming Manual Configuration of Application 55

9. INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Manual operating mode

I/O test Gap & Crash control programming

Section 9.1 on page 57 (1)

Request for:
Analogic Outputs System Password Measuring head acquisition
programming (2) parameters
Section 9.3 on page 75 User’s Password (if Section 9.2 on page 65
active)
Automatic operating mode

I/O Test Setup in Automatic mode Gap & Crash control

Section 9.1 on page 57 Section 9.4 on page 77 programming (1)

(1) Folder icon present only if the independent version of the Gap & Crash
function is present in the P7. Pls. see the relevant description in the
corresponding brochure.
(2) Folder icon present only if the corresponding function is enabled

56 Machine data – Programming Manual

9.1. I/O test
The I/O test can be performed in Manual and Automatic mode:
Manual mode: viewing of Inputs status
viewing and/or changing of the Outputs status
Automatic mode: viewing of Inputs and Outputs status

Manual operating mode

Enter
Select the Inputs and Outputs folder and press .

Press to select the icon indicated and

Enter
press

I/O byte test I/O bit test Field Bus test (Section 9.1.3)
Section 9.1.1 Section 9.1.2 Pages viewed only in case of
application with Field Bus

Automatic operating mode

Enter
Select the Inputs and Outputs folder and press .

Press to select the icon indicated and

Enter
press

I/O bytes test I/O bits test Field Bus test (Section 9.1.3)
Section 9.1.1 Section 9.1.2 Pages viewed only in case of
application with Field Bus

– Programming Manual Inputs and outputs 57

 Functionality
Although it is possible to configure as wished how many and which inputs must be
viewed and how many and which outputs must be modified, the software
automatically carries out the following tests in order to prevent incorrect operations:
Based on the total number of I/O bits present on the card (or cards), the Operator
is not allowed to configure the display screen with I/O bits that actually are not
present. For instance, if the I/O card of the gauge has a total of 32 I/O’s, it does
not make any sense viewing or changing bit number 35.
It is not allowed to change input data: when a bit has been configured as input on
the Bit Test, it is not possible anymore to change the status of the led representing
the selected input.
In the case of hardware problems on a card, for instance an output in short circuit,
all the bits referring to that card are immediately disabled. This is very useful if
more I/O cards are used, since it is possible to directly know which card requires
intervention.

9.1.1. I/O Byte test

The aim of this page is allowing to view any physical input bit and viewing and/or
changing any physical output bit. Moreover it is possible to view and/or change all
the I/O’s in groups of 8 bits (byte), 16 bits (word) and 32 bits (double word).

Note: From here on, any individual bit, group of 8 bits (byte), 16 bits (word) and
32 bits (double word) will always be indicated with “I/O port”.

Manual Automatic

I/O port value

I/O port number

I/O port type

58 I/O test – Programming Manual

 Type of I/O port
The meaning of the icons used is the following:
1 input bit
(byte) 8 input bits
(word) 16 input bits
(double word) 32 input bits
1 output bit
(byte) 8 output bits
(word) 16 output bits
(double word) 32 output bits
no I/O port has been selected.

With the color display, the input ports are represented in green and the output ports in
red.

To select the port (input, output, bit, byte, word or dword) to be viewed or changed,
press to highlight the desired field, press to view the desired type of port,
Enter
then press to confirm.

Number of I/O port

The range of the logical bits to be viewed is selected with the I/O port number based
on the type of I/O port (byte, word, dword) selected.
The maximum value of port number is controlled by the system based on the type of
port selected and to the number of I/O ports.

Note: If an individual bit ( input or output) is selected as port type, the

value of the “I/O port number” field corresponds to the number of the
individual logical bit.
If a 8, 16, 32 bits are selected, the port number indicates the byte.

Note: The correspondence between logical bit number and No. of pins of the I/O
connector(s) is reported on the “I/O list” relevant to the application in use,
present in the corresponding “Installation Manual”.

To select the number of port to be viewed, highlight the desired field by pressing ,
press or until the desired number is displayed, then press to confirm.

– Programming Manual Inputs and outputs 59

 I/O port value
Viewing of the hexadecimal value of the I/O port being considered.
Inputs: (Manual/Automatic) it is only possible to read the value of the input port.
Outputs: (Manual) it is possible to change the hexadecimal value by forcing the output
port to take a determined configuration.
(Automatic) it is only possible to read the value of the output port.

In Manual mode, to change the value of the output port, press to highlight the
corresponding field, then change the value as indicated in paragraph 5.2
“Programming numerical values” (method 2) on page 29.

9.1.2. I/O bits test

The aim of this page is allowing to view any physical input bit and to view and/or
change any physical output bit.

Manual Automatic

I/O bit status

I/O type Number of I/O logic bit

I/O bit type

The meaning of the icons used is the following:
input bit
output bit
no I/O bit has been selected.

To select the type of bit to be viewed or changed, press to highlight the desired
Enter
field, and to display the desired icon, then press to confirm.

60 I/O test – Programming Manual

 Number of the logical I/O bit
Selection of the number of the logical bit to be viewed/changed.
Note: The correspondence between logical bit number and no. of pins of the I/O
connector(s) is reported on the “I/O list” relevant to the application in use,
present in the corresponding “Installation Manual”.

To select the number of the bit to be viewed or changed, press to select the field
and press or until the desired number is displayed, then to confirm.

Status of the logical I/O bit

The bit status is indicated through a led control.
(led lit) indicates that the bit is at the high logical level (1)
(led not lit) indicates that the bit is at the low logical level (0)
input (green with color display). The bit status cannot be changed by the operator.
output (red with color display). In Manual operating mode the bit status can be
changed by the operator.

To change the logical status of the output bits, press to highlight the field, then
to change the status (. / ).

– Programming Manual Inputs and outputs 61

9.1.3. Field Bus test
The aim of this page is allowing to view any input byte of the communication channel
used and to view and/or change any output byte of the same channel. Moreover it is
possible to view and/or change all the I/O’s in groups of 16 bits (word) and 32 bits
(double word).
Note: From here on any group of 8 bits (byte), 16 bits (word) and 32 bits (double
word) will be indicated with “I/O port”.

Manual Automatic

I/O port value

I/O port number

I/O port type

Type of I/O port

The meaning of the icons used is the following:
(byte) 8 input bits
(word) 16 input bits
(double word) 32 input bits
(byte) 8 output bits
(word) 16 output bits
(double word) 32 output bits
no I/O port has been selected.

With the color display the input ports are green and the output ports are red.

To select the port (input, output, byte, word or dword) to be viewed or changed, press
Enter
to highlight the desired field, press to view the desired type of port, then
to confirm.

62 I/O test – Programming Manual

 Number of I/O port
The range of the logical bits to be displayed is selected with the I/O port number
based on the type of I/O port (byte, word, dword) selected .

To select the number of port to be viewed, press to highlight the desired field,
press or until the desired number is displayed, then to confirm.

Value of I/O port

Viewing of the hexadecimal value of the I/O port being considered.
Inputs: (Manual/Automatic) it is only possible to read the value of the input port.
Outputs: (Manual) it is possible to change the hexadecimal value by forcing the output
port to take a determined configuration.
(Automatic) it is only possible to read the value of the output port.

In Manual mode, to change the value of the output port, press to highlight the
corresponding field, then change the value as indicated in paragraph 5.2
“Programming numerical values” (method 2) on page 29.
The changed value of the outputs is not immediately sent to the field bus: highlight
to enable the data transfer, and press .

Changing/Viewing Field Bus parameters

Field Bus type Profibus-DP
Manual Automatic

Current Slave Address

Selection enabling

In Manual mode, it is possible to change the number of the current Slave Address.

1. Press : the field relevant to the current Slave Address number is highlighted.

2. Press or to display the desired number (1 to 126) and press

– Programming Manual Inputs and outputs 63

 3. Press to highlight and press to enable the selection.

Field Bus type Interbus-S

Manual Automatic

Selection enabling Software version of Master

In Manual mode, it is possible to change the software version of the master.

1. Press : the field relevant to the software version number is highlighted.

2. Press or to display the number corresponding to the desired software

version.
0 : 1st Software version of Master (default)
1 : V3.2 Software version of Master
2 : V3.7 Software version of Master
3 : V4.0 Software version of Master

press

3. Press to highlight and press to enable the selection.

64 I/O test – Programming Manual

9.2. Acquiring Measuring Heads Parameters
The following measuring head parameters in the given sequence can be acquired for
the applications allowing for it:
1. arm ratio self-learning (optimization of sensitivity gain)
2. setting in coupling (heads sensitivity adjustment)
3. retraction threshold self-learning.
4. electric sensitivity constant self-learning (procedure reserved to MARPOSS’
or technical Personnel; a prompt will appear to insert the System Password).

In Manual operating mode, select the Inputs and Outputs folder and press
.

Use to select the icon and press . The User’s Password is asked
(if active):

- type the User’s Password and press to program/modify data ( ).

Enter
If you press without having typed the User’s Password you access the data
view-only environment ( ).

Request of:
User’s Password (if active)

Prompt for System

Password

Arm Ratio self- Retraction Threshold Setting in coupling Electric Sensitivity

learning self-learning (see section 9.2.3, Constant self-
(see section 9.2.1, (see section 9.2.2, page 72 ) learning
page 66) page 70) (see section 9.2.4,
page 74

– Programming Manual Inputs and outputs 65

9.2.1. Arm Ratio self-learning
Manual operating mode.
Electrical Zeroing key

Transducer selection
Numerical area
representation and
bargraph of measuring
head
Arm ratio acquisition
Viewing retraction key
status

Bargraph of Numerical value of

measurement measurement

Note: From the Arm Ratio Acquisition page it is possible to obtain, after a
mechanical zeroing, an electrical zeroing of the system by pressing F1 or
highlighting the electrical zeroing key and pressing .

Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to be

reset. Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust values (programmed
or from BCD) as well.

The procedure for arm ratio self-learning is performed with measuring head not
retracted (if retraction is provided).

Measuring head with electric retraction

F2 key for changing the retraction state

head not retracted (in measuring position)
head retracted (measurement in +OVR)

Measuring head with pneumatic retraction

There shall be no request for pneumatic retraction from the machine logic unit
Retraction signal “Off” - Head non retracted (in measuring
position)
Retraction signal “On” - Head retracted (measurement in +OVR)

66 Acquiring Measuring Heads Parameters – Programming Manual

 Arm Ratio self-learning procedure:
1. Select the cycle corresponding to the measuring head that needs the Arm Ratio
to be acquired.
Shift
- While holding down press to highlight the Part/Cycle selection
area;

- press or to select the desired Part/Cycle, then press .

2. Use to select the transducer whose arm ratio will be acquired.

Measuring head with one Measuring head with two

transducer transducers

- T1 acquisition operation on transducer T1

- T1 acquisition operation on transducer T2
- BY MEAS operation of acquisition of the measurement absolute value

After selecting, confirm with .

Note: The modality “BY MEAS." is disabled if a virtual measuring head is
used.

3. Press F4 or highlight and press . The following page is displayed:

Stores the sample

Values calculated to
transducer
“Measurement
samples detection”
area

Shims size
“Arm ratio
values
calculation” area

4. Perform the first measurement sampling: bring the measuring head to the
measurement position corresponding to the first sampling (position the first shim
next to the contact).

– Programming Manual Inputs and outputs 67

 5. Use to select the field relevant to the first sampling and insert the real
measurement value of the first measurement sample – size of the first shim.
Enter
6. Press F1 or highlight and press . The first measurement sample is
stored and the corresponding value at the transducer is automatically evaluated.
7. Perform the second measurement sampling: bring the measuring head to the
measurement position corresponding to the second sampling (position the
second shim next to the contact).

8. Use to select the field relevant to the second sampling and insert the real
measurement value of the second measurement sample – size of the second
shim.
Enter
9. Press F2 or highlight and press . The second measurement sample is
stored and the corresponding value at the transducer is automatically evaluated.
10. Perform the third measurement sampling: bring the measuring head to the
measurement position corresponding to the third sampling (position the third
shim next to the contact).
NOTE: the third sampling is NOT mandatory (two samplings with different
value are sufficient).

11. Use to select the field relevant to the third sampling and insert the real
measurement value of the third measurement sample – size of the third shim.
Enter
12. Press F3 or highlight and press . The third measurement sample is
stored and the corresponding value at the transducer is automatically evaluated.
13. Calculate the Arm Ratio:
Reset arm ratio
acquisition

Calculation of arm
ratio

Current arm ratio value

press F4 or highlight and press . The current arm ratio value is

updated with the new value calculated.

This completes the Arm Ratio acquisition procedure for the measuring head
selected.

68 Acquiring Measuring Heads Parameters – Programming Manual

 Nota: If the arm ratio value is known, you may directly insert it in the relevant field
without needing to carry out the whole acquisition procedure.

Use to select the field of the Arm Ratio value.

Enter
insert the known Arm Ratio value and press .

– Programming Manual Inputs and outputs 69

9.2.2. Retraction Threshold self-learning

Note: With the “Thruvar” measuring head and the retraction enabled (see
chapter 8.2.2 on page 41), it is necessary to perform the retraction
threshold self-learning whenever the diameter (measurement range) is
changed.
Manual operating mode.
The measuring heads can be provided with electric or pneumatic retraction: below
there are indicated the procedures for Retraction Threshold acquisition in both cases.
Procedure for Retraction Threshold acquisition:
Select the cycle corresponding to the measuring head whose retraction threshold
needs to be acquired
Shift
- while holding down press to highlight the Set (Part/Cycle) selection
area;

- press or to select the desired Set (Part/Cycle), then press .

Measuring head with Electric Retraction

Value of retraction threshold referred

to transducers (1)
Numerical
representation and Start retraction
bargraph of measuring threshold acquisition
head

Reset retraction threshold

Change of retraction automatically acquired
status value

Bargraph of
measurement Numerical value of
measurement

Viewing retraction
status

(1) Only T1 is displayed if the measuring head has just a transducer.

1. Measuring head NOT retracted

- head not retracted (in measuring position)
- head retracted

If the head is retracted, press F2 or highlight and press to change the

retraction status.

70 Acquiring Measuring Heads Parameters – Programming Manual

 2. Press F4 or highlight and press to acquire the retraction threshold.
The value of transducers with head retracted is shown next to T1 and T2.

3. Press F2 or highlight and press to change the status (On/Off) of the

measuring head retraction. Below there is the viewing page with head retracted

Measurement
in overrange
Retraction ON

Measuring head with Pneumatic Retraction

Value of retraction threshold referred to
transducers (1)
Numerical
representation and
Start retraction
bargraph of measuring
threshold acquisition
head

Reset retraction
Status of
threshold automatically
retraction signal
acquired value

Bargraph of
measurement Numerical value of
measurement

Viewing of retraction
status

(1) Only T1 is displayed if the measuring head has just a transducer.

1. The machine logic system must not have requested to control the pneumatic
retraction status (condition a).
a) Retraction signal “Off” - Head not retracted
b) Retraction signal “On” - Head retracted
2. Open the fingers of the measuring head (either manually or supplying air to the
pneumatic retraction system).
Enter
3. Press F4 or highlight and press to acquire the retraction threshold.
The value of transducers with head retracted is shown next to T1 and T2.
This completes the Retraction Threshold acquisition procedure for the measuring
head selected.

– Programming Manual Inputs and outputs 71

9.2.3. Setting in coupling

Note: Modality disabled if a virtual measuring head is used.

After completing the arm ratio automatic acquisition, this procedure allows to change
the arm ratio of transducer T2, keeping constant the one of transducer T1 at the value
previously calculated so as to obtain an higher coupling accuracy of the sensitivity of
the two transducers.

Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to be

reset. Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust values (programmed
or from BCD) as well

Value of automatically
Automatically acquired
acquired arm ratio for T2
measurement samples

Current
measurement Manual adjustment
l

Current transducers
value

Allow to acquire the two measurement samples. When used without

having automatically acquired the arm ratio values, the message
“Warning 13 – Autoacquire arm ratio before using this method ”.
Calculates the new arm ratio value of transducer T2 for coupling
optimization.
Reset the values calculated: return to the initial autoacquired value of
arm ratio, present when entering this page.

Electric zeroing of system (after mechanical zero-setting)

72 Acquiring Measuring Heads Parameters – Programming Manual

 Procedure of setting in coupling
Acquire the measurement values on very different points of the work range of the two
transducers (preferably one in the positive range and one in the negative range for
each transducer):
1. Bring the head to measuring position.
2. Position the workpiece (or use calibrated shims) in order
to view a positive and a negative value next to T1 and T2
(e.g. T1= +200 / T2= -200).

3. Press F1 or highlight and press . The first measurement sample is

stored.

4. Position the workpiece in order to view, next to T1 and

T2, approx. symmetrical values with sign opposite to the
previous ones (e.g. T1= -200 / T2= +200)

5. Press F2 or highlight and press . The second measurement sample is

stored.

6. PRESS F4 or highlight and press . The new arm ratio value of

transducer T2 is calculated. Measurement and transducers are automatically
viewed based on the new value calculated.

Should the automatic calculation method not give the expected results, it is possible
to manually adjust the arm ratio value of transducer T2:

1. Highlight the “Manual adjustment” box and press : The following sub-page
appears:

Original arm ratio defined

Automatically acquired arm in configuration
ratio value of T1.

Automatically acquired arm Measurement value

ratio value of T2 (it could have
been changed with automatic
coupling procedure).

Note: It is advisable not to change the automatically acquired arm ratio value for
transducer T1.

2. Change the automatically acquired arm ratio value for transducer T2 to obtain
the desired sensitivity coupling.

– Programming Manual Inputs and outputs 73

 - highlight the field corresponding to T2.
- change the value

- press to confirm the value changed, then to return to the previous

page.

9.2.4. Electric Sensitivity Constant self-learning

Note: To access this procedure you are asked to type the System Password.
Confidential procedure for MARPOSS personnel or qualified Technical
Personnel: dedicated lab equipment is required.

Pressing allows to display the sub-pages with the current value of the electric
sensitivity constant.

Current value of the electric

sensitivity constant

74 Acquiring Measuring Heads Parameters – Programming Manual

9.3. Programming Analog Output
The measurement analog output can be programmed for the applications that feature
this task.
Either upon mechanical calibration or with heads retracted the measurement value on
the analog output is not indicative.

In Manual operating mode, select the Inputs and Outputs folder and press
.

Use to select the icon and press . The System Password is asked:

- press to access the data view-only environment ( )

Request of:

System Password Position of analog output

module

Channel selection

Measurement
Type of signal selection

Transducer value Sensitivity

Measurement selection: present only in the applications with composed cycles (e.g.
Taper). Press to highlight the field, and then to select measurement A or B.

An. Out. Module: indicates the position where the analog output module is fitted. The
system triggers an alarm if the datum does not match the actual position or if the
module is absent.

– Programming Manual Inputs and outputs 75

 Channel: allows viewing the two channels of the module in sequence. Press to
select channel 1 or 2.

Output type: allows choosing the type of signal to be sent out, among the ones
enabled in the current configuration,. The available types are:
Measure: measurement value of the current cycle.
Ovality: ovality measurement value, if enabled in the current cycle.
Tir: value of T.I.R. measurement, if enabled in the current cycle.
Removal speed: value of removal speed measurement, if enabled in the current
cycle.
Taper: taper measurement value, if enabled in the homonymous cycle.

Symbol indicates the type of signal selected.

Output voltage: is the range of the analog signal in Volts.

Transducer value: viewing of measurement value by the transducer.

Sensitivity: sensitivity value of analog output, defined upon configuration. This datum
can be changed making it different for each channel. The channels being equal, all
the sets share the same sensitivity value.

76 Programming Analog Output – Programming Manual

9.4. Set-Up environment in Automatic mode
The Set-Up environment in Automatic mode is in every respect an operating mode
which is actuated through an input bit of the logic unit (active in Automatic mode
only), called “Set-up in automatic”. Access to the environment is indicated both by an
output bit (Set-up in automatic in progress) and the symbol in the lower right side
of the display.
Logic bit “Set-up in Automatic”

Automatic mode Set-Up in Automatic mode

Access to the environment “Set-Up in Automatic mode” is denied when a machining

cycle is active (measuring cycle in Automatic with processing of the checks, “shape
control” cycle or TIR cycle).
Direct switching from “Set-Up in Automatic mode” to “Manual” mode is not permitted:
it is necessary to pass through the “Automatic” mode.

“Manual” “Automatic” “Set-Up in

mode mode Automatic” mode

During the set-up in automatic, the system guarantees the following functions through
signals from the machine logic unit:
retraction control with possibility of retracting the heads not selected (not
belonging to the current set). It is guaranteed the possibility of retracting or
releasing the selected heads, if suitably configured. During retraction the set-up in
automatic mode is kept.
exclusion of the possibility of carrying out a set-up in remote (through the Field
Bus) throughout the set-up in automatic.
change of set
electric zero-setting
alarm clearing (if the corresponding logic bit is present) with no need of exiting
the set-up in automatic, through the suitable logic bit, or through passage from
automatic to manual after exiting the set-up in automatic.
zeroing reset (if the corresponding logic bit is present).
control of alarms and warnings, relevant to the functions peculiar to flow
control.
BCD input

– Programming Manual Inputs and outputs 77

 Enter
In the “Set-Up in Automatic” mode select the folder identified by and press :
the following pages/functions are enabled:

Mechanical zero-setting Electric zero-setting Arm ratio self-learning

(sect. 9.4.1, page 78) (sect. 9.4.2, page 79) (sect. 9.4.3, page 80)

Retraction threshold Set-up in coupling Surface processing

self-learning (sect. 9.4.5, page 81) parameters
(sect. 9.4.4, page 81) (sect. 9.4.6, page 82)
Access to the pages is possible in Automatic mode as well, but their active objects
are enabled only when entering the environment “Set-up in Automatic” (symbol in
the lower right side of the display).

9.4.1. Mechanical zero-setting

Access to this page is always permitted, but its objects become active only when the
system enters the Set-Up in Automatic.

Page of mechanical zero-setting in Automatic (out of

the set-up environment); access is permitted, but the
transducers values are not visible, regardless the
state of the measuring cycle.

78 Set-Up environment in Automatic mode – Programming Manual

 Page of mechanical zero-setting in the “Set-Up in
Automatic” mode (symbol of Set-Up in Automatic
in the lower right side).

The mechanical zero-setting function is started within the page.

Being the machine logic unit active, the user can check the state of retraction or of
release of all the heads and not only of the ones involved in the current set, before
and after the mechanical zero-setting. The mechanical zero-setting takes place when
the heads are not retracted.
The procedure of mechanical zero-setting is similar to the one described in the
corresponding section found in the manual called “Operator’s Guide”.

9.4.2. Electric zero-setting

Access to this page is always permitted, but its objects become active only when the
system enters the Set-Up in Automatic. In this page there are no buttons and icons
relevant to the measuring head retraction since this operation is controlled by the
machine logic unit.

Page of electric zero-setting in Automatic (out of the

set-up environment) with measuring cycle active.

Page of electric zero-setting in “Set-Up in Automatic”

mode (symbol of Set-Up in Automatic in the lower
right side) with measuring heads released and zero-
setting completed.
zero-setting button

zeroing reset button

The electric zero-setting procedure is similar to the one described in the

corresponding section found in the manual called “Operator’s Guide”.

– Programming Manual Inputs and outputs 79

9.4.3. Arm ratio self-learning
Access to this page is always permitted, but its objects become active only when the
system enters the Set-Up in Automatic. In this page there are no buttons and icons
relevant to the measuring head retraction since this operation is controlled by the
machine logic unit.

Page of arm ratio self-learning in Automatic (out of

the set-up environment).

Page for arm ratio self-learning in “Set-Up in

Automatic” mode (symbol of Set-Up in Automatic
in the lower right side).

Access to the arm ratio self-learning

secondary page.

Secondary page for arm ratio self-learning in “Set-Up

in Automatic” mode; also in this page there are no
buttons and icons relevant to retraction (controlled by
the machine logic unit).

Also in “Set-Up in Automatic” mode it will be possible to retract and release a head
while acquiring the samples, without interrupting a self-learning in progress. After
having acquired a sample, it is possible to control a retraction from the machine logic
unit, replace the master, if necessary, and release the head, and then acquire another
sample.

The procedure for Arm ratio self-learning in the Set-up in Automatic mode is similar to
the procedure described for the Manual operating mode (see section 9.2.1 “Arm Ratio
self-learning “ on page 66).

80 Set-Up environment in Automatic mode – Programming Manual

9.4.4. Retraction thresholds self-learning
Access to this page is always permitted, but its objects become active only when the
system enters the Set-Up in Automatic. In this page there are no buttons and icons
relevant to the measuring head retraction since this operation is controlled by the
machine logic unit.

Page of retraction thresholds self-learning in

Automatic (out of the set-up environment).

Page of retraction thresholds self-learning in “Set-Up

in Automatic” mode (symbol of Set-Up in
Automatic in the lower right side).

The procedure for self-learning the retraction thresholds in the Set-up in Automatic
mode is similar to the procedure described for the Manual operating mode (see
section 9.2.2 “Retraction Threshold self-learning “ on page 70).

9.4.5. Set-up in coupling

Access to this page is always permitted, but its objects become active only when the
system enters the Set-Up in Automatic. In this page there are no buttons and icons
relevant to the measuring head retraction since this operation is controlled by the
machine logic unit.

Page of set-up in coupling in Automatic (out of the

set-up environment).

– Programming Manual Inputs and outputs 81

 Page of set-up in coupling in “Set-Up in Automatic”
mode (symbol of Set-Up in Automatic in the lower
right side).

From the machine logic unit it is possible to retract and release the measuring head
contacts while acquiring the samples, without interrupting a set-up in progress.
The procedure for set-up in coupling in the Set-up in Automatic mode is similar to the
procedure described for the Manual operating mode (see section 9.2.3 “Setting in
coupling “ on page 72).

9.4.6. Surface processing parameters

Access to this page is always permitted, but its objects become active only when the
system enters the Set-Up in Automatic.

Page for programming the surface processing

parameters in Automatic (out of the set-up
environment): all the data are disabled except for the
measurement value.

Page for programming the surface processing

parameters in the “Set-Up in Automatic” mode
(symbol of Set-Up in Automatic in the lower right
side).

For the data programming/editing modalities, pls. refer to the section “Type of surface
processing (interrupted surfaces)” present in the sections of this manual relevant to
the programming of the applications present.

82 Set-Up environment in Automatic mode – Programming Manual

10. PROGRAMMING APPLICATIONS

Manual operating mode

Select the Programming folder and press .

With **User’s Password** active (see 8.4.3 “Password
” on page 50), you are asked to enter it:
• type the password and press to program/modify
the data ( ).
User’s
Password Pressing without typing the password lets you just
view the data ( ).

If there are more applications (measuring cycles), use the

key to select the folder relevant to the application to
be programmed..

Example
If for the cycle just selected no set has been defined yet, the above display screen
(Example) is displayed. If at least a set has been defined, the data programming page
is displayed.
No set defined for the current cycle

Press to highlight the set selection area, then proceed

by defining the sets as described in section 6.1 “How to
define the sets at the first power-on“ on page 31.

At least one set defined for the current cycle

Press to enter the page and, if necessary, define the

new sets for the current cycle, as described in section 6.2
“How to define a new Set“ on page 33.

Program the data for the applications (measuring cycles) present, as described in the
following sections.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 83

10.1. Diameter / Diameters with Switching
This section covers programming the measurement application of a SINGLE DIAMETER
– internal or external – and its configured options.

Note: What is described in this section is also valid for the Two DIAMETERS WITH
SWITCHING measurement application.

The example screens in this section show the diameter as Part Type 1, Cycle 1 and
Head 1. This measuring cycle can be defined with different Parts/Cycles as long as
they match with the machine logic programming.

Programming is performed in Manual mode only.

Enter
Select Programming folder and press .
The User’s Password is asked (if enabled):
Enter
- type the User’s Password and press to program/modify data ( ).
Enter
If you press without having typed the User’s Password you access the data
view-only environment ( ).

84 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

10.1.1. Diameter Menu Map
There are no differences on the menu map between an external (O.D.) and an
internal (I.D.) diameter.
A B
Programming Enter
Manual operating mode. Press .
CARTELLA

Request for: 1
User’s Password (if active)

Programming of measurement parameters.

PAGINE

Sections 10.1.2 and 10.1.4

2

Getting around the program

Control points 3
Enter Section 10.1.5
move down to the next level.

move up one level

move between folders, sub- Surface elaboration

folders or pages on the same level. (only if the measuring function 4
for interrupted surfaces is
enabled). Section 10.1.6
Options
PP/IP coupling – 5
Taper compensation TIR
(Section 10.1.14) Section 10.1.7

Direct coupling –
Ovality 6
Dirac
(Section 10.1.13) Section 10.1.8

Pulse Feedback Remspeed cycle

7
(Section 10.1.11) (Adaptive Cycle).
Section 10.1.9

BCD Feedback Stock Removal 8

(Section 10.1.12) Section 10.1.10

If any of these options are not installed, then the icon and the corresponding page are not seen.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 85

10.1.1.1. Measurement optional functions (Options)
The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions.

Function keys (F6 and F3) for

measurement optional function

If there are more than two optional functions (more function keys necessary) the F6
and F3 key have dynamic management. The “scroll” icon appears within the
key, beside the associated F# key number, to indicate that there are non-displayed
function keys. Highlight the key and use the and keys to scroll the list of the
measurement optional functions (represented by the relevant icons) available. Select
the optional function by pressing the F6 or F3 function key associated to the icon of
that function.

Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the measurement optional

functions present; an optional function is active when the box to the left of the
corresponding function key is full.
Example:

TIR optional function active

86 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

10.1.2. Programming of measurement parameters
Selection/programming
of zero shift (only with Measuring head sub-page
measuring heads (definition of virtual head)
enabled for “zero shift”)

Measurement equation

Head Number of the measuring head combined to the selected Set

(part/cycle).

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”). (1)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within the zero shift
range (section 8.2.2.4 on page 43) based on the programmed ‘field center’ value
(section 8.3.1.2 on page 46).
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
Field center: 40,000 mm (programmed value)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within a range from
39,000mm to 41,000mm.

Master deviation The difference between the nominal value of master and the
gauged measurement of the workpiece used as such. (1)

Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling to gauge for starting the measuring cycle.

To program the data, proceed as follows:

highlight the field with , view the desired value (or icon) with or , then
press to confirm.

(1) Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to
Enter
be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust
values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 87

10.1.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition

To select/define a measuring head access the corresponding sub-page: use to

Enter
move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press .
The sub-page for measuring head selection/definition is different in case of
application with “single measurement” or application with “switched measurements”.
Single Measurement

Measuring head sub-page

Switched measurements

Measuring head sub-page

Definition of virtual
measuring head

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Head Measuring head number for the selected Set (part/cycle) depending on
the application characteristics.
This data CANNOT be changed in case of “single measurement”.

Note: Changing the programmed value causes the measurement zeroing to be

reset (a warning message appears: to confirm; ESC to exit without changing
the value). Resetting zeroing also involves deleting the value of the zero
corrections (either programmed or from BCD).

Display resolution for the current set:

88 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

 • Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm /0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0.00001” / 0.000001” / 0.0000001”
The possibility of changing the measure display resolution depends on the type of
application and measure range defined upon the application configuration stage
(see chapter 8.3.1.1 “Measurement viewing resolution ”, on page 46).

ABS View Selection of measure display modality (data valid only with “Zero shift”
enabled – Chapter 8.2.2, on page 41).
DISABLED: measure display in relative value
Nominal Value: measure display in absolute value with reference to the nominal
diameter.
Field Center: measure display in absolute value with reference to the field center
value.
Examples

ABS View = Nominal Value (40.0000) ABS View = Field Center

Sensor Selection enables the selection of the sensors (S#) of different

measuring heads (definition of virtual or logic head).
Set the corresponding check box to ON (press with the cursor on the
corresponding field): it is enabled the selection of the sensors S#, among the ones
present in the application in use, to be combined with T1 and T2.
The “Head” data (physical head number) becomes meaningless (is underlit).

Definition of virtual measuring head – Sensors selection

Possibility of using for each measurement sensors belonging to different measuring
heads (definition of either a virtual or a logical head instead of a physical head) in
place of T1 and T2.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 89

 Use to move the cursor to (highlight) the field "T1 Sensor Code." / "T2 Sensor

Code.", then use keys and to select the sensor number S# for T1 and for T2.

K Transducer coefficient. Value representing a coefficient of the contribution of

each individual sensor to the measurement.
Programmable between 0.001 and 100.000 (default value K=1.000).

In this way the virtual head for the selected set is defined.
In the different pages a physical head is indicated with a number between 1 and 4 (8
with expansion): the virtual head is indicated with letters X and Y.

Example
Set 2/2: measurement performed with physical head (1) - sensors T1/T2
Set 1/1: measurement performed with virtual head (X) – sensors S1/S3

Warnings !!
When checking the retraction of the sensors of a virtual head, if they belong to two
different physical heads, the remaining sensors belonging to the two physical heads
but not used for that virtual head are checked as well.
Example: when a pair of sensors type T1=S1 and T2=S3 is selected, and two sensors
(S1 and S2), are connected to the first little module, it is not possible to control the
retraction of S1 without the one of S2.
In the same way when acquiring (or resetting) the retraction threshold the physical
head is always considered, therefore if S4 and S7 are used in a virtual head also the
retraction thresholds S3 and S8 (if any) are acquired (or reset).

The zero corrections for the part -Part Adj (corrections involving all the cycles that
use the same head and belong to the same part) are not possible with virtual heads
(with physical heads only).

90 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

 Example of typical application with virtual heads

10.1.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming

Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.
Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where it is possible to select/program the type of zero shift you want.

The state of the check boxes determines the selected zero shift.

Application with “Thruvar” measuring head

i With “Thruvar” measuring head it is necessary to select one of the zero shift
self-learning modalities: static or dynamic.

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based both on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 91

 Note: The modality “Internally calculated zero shift” is disabled in case of virtual
measuring head (see chapter 10.1.2.1 “Measuring head
selection/definition”, on page 88).

Static self learning of zero shift

Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).

Modalities applicable in the following cases:

• sample part not rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth or grooved parts

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

Dynamic self learning of zero shift

Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).

Modalities applicable in the following cases:

• sample part rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth parts
• integral measurement programmed

Note: in the case of master gauge rotating, but with grooved parts, it is necessary to
use the static self-learning modality anyway.

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

92 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

 Programmed zero shift
Set the corresponding check box to ON (press
with the cursor on the corresponding field).
For each contact of the measuring head it is
possible to define its own “Zero shift” value to be
used regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.
It is possible to program in T1 and T2 a value lower/equal to the zero shift range
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
T1 = ±1000µm / T2 = ±1000µm

Use to highlight the field T1 (Zero shift for T1) or T2 (Zero shift for T2), and then
program the zero shift values in the zero shift field (see 8.2.2, on page 41 and 8.2.2.4,
on page 43) of the measuring head used. (1)

(1) Note: Changing the value programmed for T1/T2 causes the measurement
Enter
calibration to be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to
exit without changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero
adjust values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 93

10.1.3. Measurement equation
Possibility of selecting the type (equation) of measurement.

The direction and the sign of the contacts T1 and T2 determine the measurement
value.
The following selections are available: T1, T2, -T1, -T2, T1+T2, T1-T2, -T1-T2, T2-T1

To select: highlight the involved field with , press to view the desired value,
and then press to confirm.

Note: Changing the programmed value causes the measurement zeroing to be reset
(a warning message appears: to confirm; ESC to exit without changing the
value). Resetting zeroing also involves deleting the value of the zero corrections
(either programmed or from BCD).

94 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

10.1.4. Integral measurement
Function present, if enabled upon the application configuration stage.

Type of integral Enter

measurement

Parameters of the integral measurement

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average (if configured)
Elaboration for smooth parts in eccentric rotation (if configured). This
modality can be selected only in sets with measurement equation with two
contacts (T1+T2, T1-T2, -T1-T2, T2-T1). Furthermore this elaboration is
not compatible with “T.I.R.” measurement, “Ovality” measurement and
“Removal Speed Control” (these functions must be disabled if they are
present).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 95

 The selection of the type of integral measurement is conditioned by the selected
“Surface Elaboration Type ” (section 10.1.6, page 101).

Surface Elaboration Type

Type of -------- --------

integral
measure -------- -------- --------
-------- --------
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- --------

Note: the programmed “Type of integral measure” takes a different meaning in case
of elaboration of trilobal parts surface (see section 10.1.6.3, page 107).

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: (section 10.1.4.1, page 97) highlight the check-box and press .
Access to the sub-page is disabled in case of surface elaboration for trilobal parts
(see section 10.1.6.3, on page 107).

96 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

10.1.4.1. Parameters of the integral measurement
The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of “Ovality” measurement, if present (section 10.1.8, page
110) and/or from the page of ”Removal speed control”, if present (section 10.1.9,
page 112).

Ovality Measurement Removal speed control

4
Enter

Enter Enter

Parameters of the integral

measurement

4 With “Type of integral measurement” = , the parameters of the integral

measurement concern just the “Ovality” measurement (if present) and/or the
“Removal speed control” (if present). Should these options be not present,
access to the page of the integral measurement parameters is disabled.

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas.RPM” and “Rev.Percentage” are not programmable anymore.

Note: with “Type of integral measurement” = the processing requires a

minimum rotation speed during the cycle for being able to acquire the samples
required for the processing itself, so a speed of 10 RPM was adopted.
Meas. RPM Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral
measurement processing.
Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on
which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 97

 Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing).
With the check box enabled, successive measurement samples are processed so
as to display a continuous trend of the measurement itself. Thus the measurement
display is much more similar to the real trend of machining, allowing in this way a
more accurate control of the machining controls triggering and particularly of the
zero control.

Example of removal estimation processing (continuous curve)

Measurement trend (display) WITH “Removal

estimation” function

Measurement trend (display) WITHOUT

“Removal estimation” function

1, 2, 3, 4, -- measurement sampling points

(1-2), (2-3), -- straight line of interpolation between the corresponding
measurement points

The measurement is not updated at each revolution of the workpiece, but

continuously: the trend of the measurement up to the successive measurement
sampling is defined based on the interpolation between two successive
measurement samples. A new interpolation between the last two samplings is
performed by defining the new measurement trend up to the next sampling, and so
on down to “zero”.

98 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

10.1.5. Control Points
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of machining control points including a
zero control (the number of control points is defined at the application configuration
level).

10.1.5.1. Programming control points value

The control points are pre-programmed with a default value. The zero control cannot
be set since it concerns the final size of workpiece.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the control points programming page, press F4 or highlight

and press .

Default value of
Viewing the position of
control points
the different control
points

1. Press to highlight the control point, select the desired value with or
, then press .
or

press to highlight the control point, then .

- press or to select the digit that needs changing and or to

display the desired value (repeat for each digit that needs to be programmed).

- press .

2. Repeat step 1 for all control points to be programmed, then press .

Note: The control points must be programmed in increasing order from “zero”;
otherwise “Error 4” is displayed when exiting programming.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 99

10.1.5.2. Removing control points
To remove one or more control points act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be removed.

2. While holding down press . The control point is removed (No) and
viewing of control points position is updated based on the remaining control
points.

3. Press . Control points

disabled

10.1.5.3. Restoring control points

To restore the control points previously removed, act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be restored

2. While holding down press . The control point is restored with the last
programmed value. If this value needs to be changed, follow the procedure to
program a control point.

3. Press .

100 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

10.1.6. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
Access to the programming of the data relevant to the type of surface processing is
enabled only if the measurement of “interrupted surfaces” was enabled upon the
application configuration stage.
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the data relevant to the measurement of interrupted surfaces

press F5 or highlight and press .
Surface elaboration
Surface elaboration type coefficient

Integral measurement type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

The programming / validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the
“Surface Elaboration Type ” selected (see the table below):
Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration Fixed Fixed Fixed

coefficient at 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes at 1 at 1
Integral measurement
No No No Yes Yes No No
type
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Algorithm type No No No Yes Yes No No
Estim. Removal No Yes Yes No No No No

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 101

 Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Surface Elaboration Type Selection of the type of workpiece based on the

surface features (interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of
the measurement processing.

Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Inside diameter measurement (also while swinging). Option selectable

only if upon the configuration stage the corresponding measuring head
was configured for the measurement of inside diameters.
Elaboration for cams (see section 10.1.6.2, page 106)
Elaboration for trilobal parts (see section 10.1.6.3, page 107)

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).

“Surface Elaboration Type” = ” (smooth workpiece): the data is fixed at “1”.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated with three different damping speeds; the first above control
C2, the second between controls C2 and C1, the third below control C1 (see the
table below). Should the machining controls not be used, the points of damping
variation are fixed at +150µm and +50µm (measurement values).

Machining Surface elaboration coefficient

NO controls
controls 1 2 3
Damping speeds
480 µm/s 240 µm/s 128 µm/s
C2 +150 µm
120 µm/s 60 µm/s 32 µm/s
C1 +50µm
30 µm/s 15 µm/s 8 µm/s

High damping speed smaller damping

102 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

 Low damping speed higher damping
The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3; the
higher the damping, the slower will be the measurement reduction. If damping is
excessive, it might happen that during machining the wheel removes an amount of
stock higher than the gauged stock.
Therefore the damping speed shall be higher than the wheel feeding speed.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and

3) causes the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the
workpiece. The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for
coefficients 2 and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

Algorithm type The programmable algorithm type depends on the “Surface

elaboration coefficient” programmed.
Surface elaboration coefficient
Algorithm type
1 2 3
THRESHOLD Yes No No
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Yes Yes Yes
DERIVATE No Yes Yes

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory

Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.

HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside: it
can only run with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral
measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
Remind that there is just one digital clock signal available, so the measurement
processing with external synchronism can be performed either on the integral
measurement (see section 10.1.4 on page 95) or the surface processing.

DERIVATE – Derived memory

The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 10.1.6.1, on page 105.

Once completed the correct programming of the surface processing coefficient,

should there be a measurement instability still present, it can be limited by

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 103

 programming/changing the “Surface Adjust.” parameter (see section 10.1.6.4, page
108).

Integral Measurement Type Selection of the type of integral measurement for the
period of validity of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing).
With the check box enabled, the measurement damping value does not depend
anymore on the “Surface elaboration coefficient” programmed (1, 2 or 3), but is
automatically calculated at each measurement interruption (interruption of the
workpiece).
The calculated damping value automatically matches each variation in the removal
speed.
Example of removal estimation processing for measurement of grooved
workpieces

Measurement trend (display) WITH

“Estimation Removal ” function

Display of the measurement with reference to

the transducer (display without damping)

1, 2, 3 Measurement trend (display) with programmed damping, WITHOUT

“Estimation Removal ” function. The measurement is displayed based

104 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

 on the damping value defined through the programming (1, 2 or 3) of
the “Surface elaboration coefficient”.
Note: programming 3 is wrong in the example proposed: the
measurement damping speed is slower than the stock removal.
Programmings 1 and 2 are correct.

10.1.6.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
parameters (A)
Measure Times (B) No No No Yes Yes No No
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application

configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).
These parameters take a different meaning and value depending on the
“Surface elaboration coefficient” (1, 2, 3) programmed.

B Measure times (programmable parameters)

Surface elaboration coefficient

1 2 3
= 7 ms 4 = 10 ms 4
Latency Time Yes Yes Yes
= 60 ms 4 = 40 ms 4
Measure Time Yes Yes Yes
4 Default values

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 105

 Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.

Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time

during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

“Surface Elaboration Type ” = workpiece with keyway

Normal keyway: program the data to “zero”.
Keyway with chamfered entry (the jump of the contact in the air is not rapid and
could be not detected, causing in this way possible problems to the correct
measurement of the workpiece): program the time upon which the contact
remains on the full section. In this case the interruption in the measurement
detection is not determined by the contact entering the keyway, but on a timing
basis.

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).
These parameters take a different value depending on the programming of the
“Surface elaboration type” and “Surface elaboration coefficient” parameters (1,
2, 3).

10.1.6.2. Elaboration for cams

In the “Surface elaboration type” sub-page it is also possible to select the type of
elaboration for cams (parts with cam profiles with just one lobe) if it was enabled upon
the application configuration stage.

Elaboration for cams is not compatible with “T.I.R.” measurement, “Ovality”

measurement, and “Removal Speed Control” (these functions must be disabled if
they are present).

106 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

10.1.6.3. Elaboration for trilobal parts
In the “Surface elaboration type” sub-page it is also possible to select the type of
elaboration for Trilobal parts (parts with cam profiles with three identical lobes
arranged at 120°) if it was enabled upon the application configuration stage.

If the elaboration for trilobal parts is configured, it can be selected only in sets with the
following measurement equation with two contacts “T1+T2” (see section 10.1.3
“Measurement equation”, page 94). With another type of measurement equation the
elaboration for trilobal parts is not permitted.
Furthermore the elaboration for trilobal parts is not compatible with “T.I.R.”
measurement, “Ovality” measurement, and “Removal Speed Control” (these functions
must be disabled if they are present).

Programming of integral measurement for trilobal parts

Type of integral
measurement

The programming of the type of integral measurement (measurement updated at the

passage of each lobe) takes the following meaning:

Measurement of the last lobe

Measurement of the maximum value of the last three lobes
Measurement of the minimum value of the last three lobes
Average of the last three lobes
Since the elaboration for trilobal parts is self-synchronizing (variation of contact T2
measurement), it is not possible to program the parameters relevant to the integral
elaboration. (see section 10.1.4.1, page 97).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 107

10.1.6.4. Adjusting the surface processing
By adjusting the surface processing the filtering of the measurement bounces (that
occur when the contact comes in contact with the workpiece).
Manual operating mode.

Enter

Surface adjust value

(-10 to + 10)

Numerical value of
measurement

Bargraph of measurement

Select the Part/Cycle (see section 6.3 on page 34) and bring the measuring head to
gauging position with the workpiece rotating.

1. Press to highlight the “Surface adjust ” value.

2. Press or to change the value (range ±10) until the measurement is

stable.

3. Press . When exiting the page (by pressing ) the system asks to confirm:
highlight “Yes” and press .

108 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

10.1.7. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option)
It allows determining (using just one contact – T1) the eccentricity error of the
workpiece as to the correct rotation axis.
Upon Programming the TIR option can be enabled or disabled and its characteristics
be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the TIR
measurement data.

TIR control enabled

TIR control disabled

Enabling/Disabling TIR control

Press to highlight the item “Tir” and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).

Note: The TIR check can NOT be enabled with “Surface elaboration type” =
or .
Act as follows for programming data:
highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).
TIR control Value beyond which the T.I.R. measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.
Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The “TIR Rpm” data is not programmable anymore..
TIR Rpm Rotation speed of the workpiece during T.I.R. measurement.
TIR delay Time delay before taking the T.I.R. measurement.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 109

10.1.8. Ovality (Option)
Check of workpiece ovality.
Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).
Upon Programming the Ovality option can be enabled or disabled and its
characteristics be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the
ovality measurement data.

Ovality control enabled

Ovality control disabled

Enter

Parameters of the integral measurement

Enabling/Disabling Ovality control

Press to highlight the item “Ovality” and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).

Note: The Ovality check can NOT be enabled with “Surface elaboration type” =
or .

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

110 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

 Ovality Control Value beyond which the ovality measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: highlight the check-box and press .

10.1.8.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of integral measurement (section 10.1.4 “Integral
measurement”, page 95) and/or from the page of ”Removal speed control”, if present
(section 10.1.9, page 112).

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not programmable
anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing). See the description
of the “Estimated Removal” function on page 98.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 111

10.1.9. Stock removal speed control (Adaptive Cycle) (Option)
It monitors the stock removal rate of the workpiece. When the rate falls above or
below the control limits a signal is sent to the machine’s logic system.
Upon Programming the Stock Removal Speed option can be enabled or disabled and
its characteristics be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the stock
removal speed control (Adaptive Cycle) data.
Removal speed control enabled

Removal speed control disabled

Enter

Parameters of the integral measurement

Enabling/Disabling Removal speed control

Press to highlight the item “Remspeed” and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Remspeed Control 1 lower programmed control point.

Remspeed Control 2 upper programmed control point.

The Gauge gives the machine’s logic information about stock removal in time
(µm/s) through the status (on/off) of Remspeed 1 and Remspeed 2 control points.

112 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

 Remspeed Control 1 Remspeed Control 2
OFF OFF Excessive removal
ON OFF Removal OK
ON ON Insufficient removal

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: highlight the check-box and press .

10.1.9.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of integral measurement (section 10.1.4 “Integral
measurement”, page 95) and/or from the page of ”Ovality control”, if present (section
10.1.8, page 110).

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not programmable
anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing). See the description
of the “Estimated Removal” function on page 98.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 113

10.1.10. Stock Removal (Option)
This option allows carrying out machining cycles in which a predetermined amount of
stock is removed, instead of reaching zero.
Upon Programming the “Stock removal” function can be enabled/disabled, and its
characteristics be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming; see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the stock
removal data.

Definition of stock removal type

Defining the type of stock removal

Enter
View the desired value using or , then press to confirm the selection:

DISABLED Stock removal function disabled (the actual stock of the

workpiece is removed).

ABSOLUTE Stock removal function enabled, with removal of a constant

amount of stock

PERCENTAGE Stock removal function enabled, with removal of a percentage

amount of stock

114 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

10.1.10.1. Removal of a constant amount of stock (ABSOLUTE)
Removal of a predetermined and constant amount of stock.

Stock Removal Amount Amount of stock to be removed (default value:

100µm).
For programming act as follows: highlight the involved field with , view the desired
Enter
value using or , then press to confirm.

Note: in case the electronic unit has been set up in order to receive the stock removal
from an external signal (BCD, Binary or Field Bus), the amount of stock to be
removed (Stock Removal Amount) cannot be programmed; the stock value is
received in Automatic mode before the cycle and concerns the selected set. Next to
the “ Stock Removal Amount” will be displayed the last stock removal value received
from the external signal.

10.1.10.2. Removal of a percentage amount of stock (PERCENTAGE)

Removal of a percentage amount of the detected stock.

Stock Removal Percentage Percentage of stock to be removed (1 to 99%).

Default value: 50%.
For programming act as follows: highlight the involved field with , view the desired
Enter
value using or , then press to confirm.

Note: in case the electronic unit has been set up in order to receive the stock removal
from an external signal (BCD, Binary or Field Bus), the percentage of stock to be
removed (Stock Removal Percentage) cannot be programmed; the stock pecentage
value is received in Automatic mode before the cycle and concerns the selected set.
Next to the “ Stock Removal Percentage” will be displayed the last stock removal
percentage value received from the external signal.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 115

10.1.11. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
We call Pulsed Feedback the measurement correction through “zero” shift determined
by pulses supplied through external logic unit.
Such a shift may be both positive and negative based on the type of pulse.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Pulsed Feedback” option and
define its characteristics.

Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the
Pulsed Feedback data.

Pulsed Feedback active

Pulsed Feedback not active

Pulsed Feedback enabling/disabling

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Feedback” and press to change its status
(active/not active).

Act as follows to program the data:

use to highlight the involved field, view the desired value with or , and
Enter
then press to confirm.

Pulse Weight minimum correction value (0 to 50 µm) performed at each pulse.

116 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

10.1.12. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
Correction of the In-Process measurement based on a determined Post-Process
measurement performed with Marposs gauge. The communication between the two
applications takes place through BCD/Binary interface.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “BCD Feedback” option and
define its characteristics.
Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the BCD
Feedback data.

BCD Feedback active

BCD Feedback not active

BCD Feedback enabling/disabling

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Feedback” and press to change its status
(active/not active).

Act as follows for programming:

use to highlight the involved field, view the desired value with or , and
then press to confirm.

Corr. Code request code associated with the measurement you want to correct
(combination of Post-Process measurement and the current In-Process
measurement). The default value is automatically generated when the set is
created based on the part code and cycle code.
The In-Process set that shall perform the correction based on the measurement
performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same "Correction Code"
number of the Post-Process measurement associated.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 117

 Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

BCD
Feedback
The admissible "Correction code" values depend on the type of interface from
which the correction comes (interface type defined upon the configuration):
BCD interface: values between 1 and 79
Binary interface: values between 1 and 127

Interface number identification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which
the correction value comes. The maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is
fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).
The In-Process set that shall perform the correction based on the measurement
performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same "Interface Number"
of the Post-Process measurement associated.

Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

BCD
Feedback

118 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

10.1.13. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)
The Dirac application consists in the execution of the In-Process measurement of a
workpiece (typically an outside diameter) directly coupled with the Pre-Process
measurement of another workpiece (typically an inside diameter – hole).
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Dirac” option and define its
characteristics.
Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the Dirac
application data.

Dirac function active

Dirac function not active

Enabling/disabling the Dirac function

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Dirac” and press to change its status (
function active / function not active).

Act as follows to program the data:

use to highlight the involved field, or to view the desired value, then
Enter
press to confirm.

Correction Source the type of source of the correction values for the Dirac
function may be:

INTERNAL the correction comes from a set of the Post-Process type of the
same In-Process measurement CPU card that must carry out the
Dirac application.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 119

 Example of "INTERNAL source"

In-Process measurement Post-Process measurement

In-Process measurement
CPU card

EXTERNAL the correction comes from a Post-Process measurement processed

in a Post-Process measurement CPU card belonging to the different
equipment.
With correction source of the EXTERNAL type it is necessary to
program the "Interface number" data as well.

Example of "EXTERNAL source"

In-Process measurement
CPU card
P7 Post-Process Measurement

P7 In-Process Measurement
Post-Process
measurement CPU card

Correction Code request code associated with the measurement on which

you want to carry out the Dirac-type correction. The default value is automatically
generated when the set is created, based on the part code and cycle code.
With INTERNAL-type "Correction source":
the admissible "Correction code" values range between 1 and 127.
the "Correction code" of the set of the In-Process type that must carry out the
Dirac correction shall be the same of the associated set of the Post-Process
type that determines the correction value.

120 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

 Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process cycle Set

Dirac

With EXTERNAL-type "Correction source": the In-Process set that shall perform
the Dirac correction based on the measurement performed on a Post-Process
control plan shall have the same "Correction Code" number of the Post-Process
measurement associated.

Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

Dirac

The admissible "Correction code" values depend on the type of interface from
which the correction comes (interface type defined upon the configuration):
• BCD interface: values between 1 and 79
• Binary interface: values between 1 and 127.

Correction Sign selection of sign (+ or -) for the Dirac correction.

+ sign (default): standard Dirac application (Post-Process measurement inside
diameter / In-Process measurement outside diameter)
- sign: special Dirac application (the sign of the correction is inverted).
Example: Post-Process measurement outside diameter / In-Process
measurement inside diameter.

Interface Numberidentification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which the
Dirac correction comes (with EXTERNAL-type "Correction source" only). The
maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 121

 The In-Process set that shall perform the Dirac correction based on the
measurement performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same
"Interface Number" of the Post-Process measurement associated.

Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

Dirac

One correction at a cycle Dirac correction used either only once (for just one
cycle) or more times (for more cycles)
Dirac correction used for an In-Process cycle only
Dirac correction used for more In-Process cycles

122 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

10.1.14. PP/IP coupling – Taper compensation (Option)
Possibility of associating an In-Process diameter measurement to one or more
Pre/Post-Process measurements among the following ones:
• T.I.R. cycle
• Simple or double Post-Process diameter cycle
• Passive centering cycle
• Passive positioning cycle
During the execution of the cycle in automatic operating mode this function makes it
possible to monitor the value of the Pre/Post-Process measurements associated to it.
To associate the sets you just have to set the same code (1 to 31, necessarily
different from 0) in all the sets to be coupled.

Note: for the T.I.R. measurement it is not necessary to program a specific coupling
code since it is obtained as a cycle of the same set of the In-Process measurement
(see section 10.1.7 on page 109).

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of “PP/IP
coupling” application data.

Example: association of In-Process diameter / Passive Positioning measurement

Coupling Code code of association between the sets (1 to 31). Code “0” indicates
no association.
Enter
use or to view the desired value, then press to confirm.

The value of the associated measurements will be

visible, in automatic operating mode, in a single display
page. The measurements corresponding to nonexistent
sets or sets not associated with the corrent one are
displayed with --------- (see the example screen page).

In case of an association between an In-Process diameter measurement set and a

Passive Positioning set it will be possible to enable the taper compensation function.
(see section 10.1.14.1 on page 124).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 123

10.1.14.1. Taper compensation
Taper compensation based on the last positioning cycle performed.

Enabling/disabling the “Taper compensation” function

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Conical Correction” and press to change its
status ( function active / function not active).

Act as follows to program the data:

use to highlight the involved field, or to view the desired value, then
Enter
press to confirm.

Correction Sign Sign of the taper angle, programmable + or – based both on the
direction of the cone and on the position of the Positionar measuring head.
If it was programmed in the data of the Passive Positionar, the Measure Sign
datum = + (default value), the Correction Sign datum takes the following meaning:

In-process Diameter: Sign = - In-process Diameter: Sign = +

Passive Positionar: Measure sign = + Passive Positionar: Measure sign = +

In-process Diameter: Sign = + In-process Diameter: Sign = -

Passive Positionar: Measure sign = + Passive Positionar: Measure sign = +

P = Positionar measuring head

124 Diameter / Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual

 In-process Diameter Passive Positionar

Note: If you invert the sign of the Passive Positionar measurement (Measure
Sign datum) you also have to invert the programming of the Correction
Sign datum (in all the configurations).

Angle Value – Value of the cone angle. The angle value can be programmed 0 to 44°
59’ 59”.
Angle value

The taper compensation is calculated based on the last positioning cycle performed
as soon as the In-Process cycle is selected.
If no Passive Positioning sets are associated to the current In-Process diameter set,
that is if at least an associated Passive Positioning cycle is not preventively
performed, the compensation will prove to be null.
If more Passive Positioning sets are associated to the same In-Process diameter set,
the compensation will be performed using the last positioning cycle performed.
In case of passage to the manual mode the passive positioning measurement will be
reset; in case of a successive passage to the automatic mode the compensation will
prove to be null until a new Positioning cycle is performed.
If the calculated compensation is higher that the maximum zero correction permitted,
the alarm “Excessive taper compensation” will be issued. In this case the involved
compensation will not be applied (also if the alarm is cleared) up to a new positioning
cycle or a re-programming of the taper angle of the part.
No taper compensation is performed with a positioning value higher than 2000 µm in
absolute value.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 125

10.2. Two Diameters Simultaneously
This section covers programming the measurement application of TWO DIAMETERS
SIMULTANEOUSLY (Diameter 1 and Diameter 2) and its configured options.

Note: What is described in this section is also valid for the SINGLE DIAMETER
measurement application.

The example screens in this section show the single diameter cycle as Part Type 1,
Cycle 1, and the two diameters simultaneously cycle as Part 1 and Cycle 2.
In the rest of the chapter the example screens will be the ones of the pages relevant
to Diameter 1; the pages relevant to Diameter 2 are identical.

This measuring cycle can be defined with different Parts/Cycles as long as they
match with the machine logic programming.

Programming is performed in Manual mode only.

Enter
Select Programming folder and press .
The User’s Password is asked (if enabled):
Enter
- type the User’s Password and press to program/modify data ( ).
Enter
If you press without having typed the User’s Password you access the data
view-only environment ( ).

Note: The parameters relevant to the TWO DIAMETERS SIMULTANEOUSLY

measurement application is independent for Diameter 1 and Diameter 2.

126 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

10.2.1. Two Diameters Simultaneously Menu Map
A B C
Programming
Request for: Manual operating mode.
User’s Password (if active) Enter
Press . 1

Two Diameters Simultaneously

Single Diameter Diameter 1 Diameter 2

2

Parameters/measurement options programming.

Programming is independent for Single Diameter, Diameter 1 and Diameter 2.
The programming pages are identical, only the icon of the page identifying the measurement type is 3
different.

Surface elaboration
(only if the measuring
function for interrupted Control points 4
surfaces is enabled). Section 10.2.5
Section 10.2.6

Options

Stock removal speed 5

TIR control (Adaptive cycle)
Section 10.2.7 Section 10.2.9

Ovality Stock Removal 6

Section 10.2.8 Section 10.2.10

Feed Back ad impulsi BCD Feed Back 7

(Section 10.2.11) (Section 10.2.12)

Accoppiamento
PP/IP coupling 8
diretto – Dirac
(Section 10.2.13) (Section 10.2.14)

If any of these options are not installed, then the icon and the corresponding page are not seen.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 127

 Getting around the program
Enter
move down to the next level.

move up one level

move between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level.

10.2.1.1. Measurement optional functions (Options)

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions.

Function keys (F6 and F3) for

measurement optional function

If there are more than two optional functions (more function keys necessary) the F6
and F3 key have dynamic management. The “scroll” icon appears within the
key, beside the associated F# key number, to indicate that there are non-displayed
function keys. Highlight the key and use the and keys to scroll the list of the
measurement optional functions (represented by the relevant icons) available. Select
the optional function by pressing the F6 or F3 function key associated to the icon of
that function.

Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the measurement optional

functions present; an optional function is active when the box to the left of the
corresponding function key is full.
Example:

TIR optional function active

128 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

10.2.2. Programming of measurement parameters
Identical programming pages independent for each measurtement are available, only
the icon of the page identifying the measurement type is different: below there is the
page relevant to Diameter 1.

Selection/programming Measuring head sub-page

of zero shift (only with (definition of virtual head)
measuring heads
enabled for “zero shift”)

Measurement equation

Head Number of the measuring head combined to the selected Set (part/cycle).
Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”). (1)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within the zero shift
range (section 8.2.2.4 on page 43) based on the programmed ‘field center’ value
(section 8.3.1.2 on page 46).
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
Field center: 40,000 mm (programmed value)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within a range from
39,000mm to 41,000mm.
Master deviation The difference between the nominal value of master and the
gauged measurement of the workpiece used as such. (1)
Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling to gauge for starting the measuring cycle. The
delay value is the same for Diameter 1 and Diameter 2.

To program the data, proceed as follows:

highlight the field with , view the desired value (or icon) with or , then
press to confirm.
(1) Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to
Enter
be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust
values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 129

10.2.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition

To select/define a measuring head access the corresponding sub-page: use to

Enter
move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press .

Definition of virtual Measuring head sub-page

measuring head

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Head Measuring head number for the selected Set (part/cycle) depending on
the application characteristics.
Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to be
Enter
reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust
values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system : 1 µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01 µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0.00001” / 0.000001” / 0.0000001”
The possibility of changing the measure display resolution depends on the type of
application and measure range defined upon the application configuration stage
(see chapter 8.3.1.1 “Measurement viewing resolution “, on page 46).

Note: The value of “Viewing resolution” is the same for Diameter 1 and
Diameter 2.

ABS View Selection of measure display modality (data valid only with “Zero shift”
enabled – Chapter 8.2.2, on page 41).
DISABLED: measure display in relative value.

130 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

 Nominal Value: measure display in absolute value with reference to the nominal
diameter.
Field Center: measure display in absolute value with reference to the field center
value.
Examples

ABS View = Nominal Value (40.0000) ABS View = Field Center

Sensor Selection enables the selection of the sensors (S#) of different

measuring heads (definition of virtual or logic head).
Set the corresponding check box to ON (press with the cursor on the
corresponding field): it is enabled the selection of the sensors S#, among the ones
present in the application in use, to be combined with T1 and T2.
The “Head” data (physical head number) becomes meaningless (is underlit).

Definition of virtual measuring head – Sensors selection

Possibility of using for each measurement sensors belonging to different measuring
heads (definition of either a virtual or a logical head instead of a physical head) in
place of T1 and T2.

Use to move the cursor to (highlight) the field "T1 Sensor Code" / "T2 Sensor

Code", then use keys and to select the sensor number S# for T1 and for T2.

K Transducer coefficient. Value representing a coefficient of the contribution of

each individual sensor to the measurement.
Programmable between 0.001 and 100.000 (default value K=1.000).
In this way the virtual head for the selected set is defined.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 131

 In the different pages a physical head is indicated with a number between 1 and 4 (8
with expansion): the virtual head is indicated with letters X and Y.
Example
Measure B: measurement performed with physical head (2) - sensors T1/T2
Measure A: measurement performed with virtual head (X) – sensors S1/S4

Warnings !!
When checking the retraction of the sensors of a virtual head, if they belong to two
different physical heads, the remaining sensors belonging to the two physical heads
but not used for that virtual head are checked as well.
Example: when a pair of sensors type T1=S1 and T2=S3 is selected, and two sensors
(S1 and S2), are connected to the first little module, it is not possible to control the
retraction of S1 without the one of S2.
In the same way when acquiring (or resetting) the retraction threshold the physical
head is always considered, therefore if S4 and S7 are used in a virtual head also the
retraction thresholds S3 and S8 (if any) are acquired (or reset).
The zero corrections for the part -Part Adj (corrections involving all the cycles that
use the same head and belong to the same part) are not possible with virtual heads
(with physical heads only).
Example of typical application with virtual heads

132 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

10.2.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming
Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.
Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where it is possible to select/program the type of zero shift you want.

The state of the check boxes determines the selected zero shift.

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based both on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Note: The modality “ Internally calculated zero shift ” is disabled in case of virtual
measuring head (see chapter 10.2.2.1”, on page 130).

Static self learning of zero shift

Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).

Modalities applicable in the following cases:

• sample part not rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth or grooved parts

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 133

 Dynamic self learning of zero shift
Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).

Modalities applicable in the following cases:

• sample part rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth parts
• integral measurement programmed

Note: in the case of master gauge rotating, but with grooved parts, it is necessary to
use the static self-learning modality anyway.

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press
with the cursor on the corresponding field).
For each contact of the measuring head it is
possible to define its own “Zero shift” value to be
used regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.
It is possible to program in T1 and T2 a value lower/equal to the zero shift range
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
T1 = ±1000µm / T2 = ±1000µm

Use to highlight the field T1 (Zero shift for T1) or T2 (Zero shift for T2), and then
program the zero shift values in the zero shift field (see 8.2.2, on page 41 and 8.2.2.4,
on page 43) of the measuring head used. (1)

(1) Note: Changing the value programmed for T1/T2 causes the measurement
Enter
calibration to be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to
exit without changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero
adjust values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

134 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

10.2.3. Measurement equation
Possibility of selecting the type (equation) of measurement.

The direction and the sign of the contacts T1 and T2 determine the measurement
value.
The following selections are available: T1, T2, -T1, -T2, T1+T2, T1-T2, -T1-T2, T2-T1

To select: highlight the involved field with , press to view the desired value,
and then press to confirm.

Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to be

Enter
reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust values
(programmed or from BCD) as well.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 135

10.2.4. Integral measurement
Function present, if enabled upon the application configuration stage.

Type of integral Enter

measurement

Parameters of the integral measurement

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average (if configured)

136 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

 The selection of the type of integral measurement is conditioned by the selected
“Surface Elaboration Type” (section 10.2.6, page 142).
Surface Elaboration Type

Type of
integral -------- --------
measure
-------- --------

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: highlight the check-box and press .

10.2.4.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of “Ovality” measurement, if present (section 10.2.8, page
150) and/or from the page of ”Removal speed control”, if present (section 10.2.9,
page 152).

Ovality Measurement Removal speed control

4
Enter

Enter Enter

Parameters of the integral

measurement

4 With “Type of integral measurement” = , the parameters of the integral

measurement concern just the “Ovality” measurement (if present) and/or the
“Removal speed control” (if present). Should these options be not present,
access to the page of the integral measurement parameters is disabled.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 137

 Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas.RPM” and “Rev.Percentage” are not programmable anymore.

Note: with “Type of integral measurement” = the processing requires a

minimum rotation speed during the cycle for being able to acquire the samples
required for the processing itself, so a speed of 10 RPM was adopted.
Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral
measurement processing.
Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on
which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.
Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing).
With the check box enabled, successive measurement samples are processed so
as to display a continuous trend of the measurement itself. Thus the measurement
display is much more similar to the real trend of machining, allowing in this way a
more accurate control of the machining controls triggering and particularly of the
zero control.

Example of removal estimation processing (continuous curve)

Measurement trend (display) WITH “Removal
estimation” function

Measurement trend (display) WITHOUT

“Removal estimation” function

1, 2, 3, 4, -- measurement sampling points

(1-2), (2-3), -- straight line of interpolation between the corresponding
measurement points

138 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

 The measurement is not updated at each revolution of the workpiece, but
continuously: the trend of the measurement up to the successive measurement
sampling is defined based on the interpolation between two successive
measurement samples. A new interpolation between the last two samplings is
performed by defining the new measurement trend up to the next sampling, and so
on down to “zero”.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 139

10.2.5. Control Points
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of machining control points including a
zero control (the number of control points is defined at the application configuration
level).

10.2.5.1. Programming control points value

The control points are pre-programmed with a default value. The zero control cannot
be set since it concerns the final size of workpiece.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the control points programming page, press F4 or highlight

and press .
Default value of control
points

Viewing the position of

the different control
points

1. Press to highlight the control point, select the desired value with or
, then press .
or

press to highlight the control point, then .

- press or to select the digit that needs changing and or to

display the desired value (repeat for each digit that needs to be programmed).

- press .

2. Repeat step 1 for all control points to be programmed, then press .

Note: The control points must be programmed in increasing order from “zero”;
otherwise “Error 4” is displayed when exiting programming.

140 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

10.2.5.2. Removing control points
To remove one or more control points act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be removed.

2. While holding down press . The control point is removed (No) and
viewing of control points position is updated based on the remaining control
points.

3. Press .
Control points
disabled

10.2.5.3. Restoring control points

To restore the control points previously removed, act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be restored

2. While holding down press . The control point is restored with the last
programmed value. If this value needs to be changed, follow the procedure to
program a control point.

3. Press .

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 141

10.2.6. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
Access to the programming of the data relevant to the type of surface processing is
enabled only if the measurement of “interrupted surfaces” was enabled upon the
application configuration stage.
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the data relevant to the measurement of interrupted surfaces

press F5 or highlight and press .
Surface elaboration
Surface elaboration type coefficient

Integral measurement type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

The programming / validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the
“Surface Elaboration Type ” selected (see the table below):
Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes Yes
Estim. Removal No Yes Yes No No

142 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

 Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Surface Elaboration Type Selection of the type of workpiece based on the

surface features (interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of
the measurement processing.
Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Inside diameter measurement (also while swinging). Option selectable

only if upon the configuration stage the corresponding measuring head
was configured for the measurement of inside diameters.

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).

“Surface Elaboration Type” = ” (smooth workpiece): the data is fixed at “1”.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated with three different damping speeds; the first above control
C2, the second between controls C2 and C1, the third below control C1 (see the
table below). Should the machining controls not be used, the points of damping
variation are fixed at +150µm and +50µm (measurement values).

Machining Surface elaboration coefficient

NO controls
controls 1 2 3
Damping speeds
480 µm/s 240 µm/s 128 µm/s
C2 +150 µm
120 µm/s 60 µm/s 32 µm/s
C1 +50µm
30 µm/s 15 µm/s 8 µm/s

High damping speed smaller damping

Low damping speed higher damping

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 143

 The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3; the
higher the damping, the slower will be the measurement reduction. If damping is
excessive, it might happen that during machining the wheel removes an amount of
stock higher than the gauged stock.
Therefore the damping speed shall be higher than the wheel feeding speed.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and

3) causes the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the
workpiece. The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for
coefficients 2 and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

Algorithm type The programmable algorithm type depends on the “Surface

elaboration coefficient” programmed.
Surface elaboration coefficient
Algorithm type
1 2 3
THRESHOLD Yes No No
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Yes Yes Yes
DERIVATE No Yes Yes

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory

Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.

HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside: it
can only run with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral
measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
Remind that there is just one digital clock signal available, so the measurement
processing with external synchronism can be performed either on the integral
measurement (see section 10.2.4 on page 136) or the surface processing.

DERIVATE – Derived memory

The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 10.2.6.1, on page 146.

Once completed the correct programming of the surface processing coefficient,

should there be a measurement instability still present, it can be limited by

144 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

 programming/changing the “Surface Adjust.” parameter (see section 10.2.6.2, page
148).

Integral Measurement Type Selection of the type of integral measurement for the
period of validity of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing).
With the check box enabled, the measurement damping value does not depend
anymore on the “Surface elaboration coefficient” programmed (1, 2 or 3), but is
automatically calculated at each measurement interruption (interruption of the
workpiece).
The calculated damping value automatically matches each variation in the removal
speed.

Example of removal estimation processing for measurement of grooved

workpieces

Measurement trend (display) WITH

“Estimation Removal ” function

Display of the measurement with reference to

the transducer (display without damping)

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 145

 1, 2, 3 Measurement trend (display) with programmed damping, WITHOUT
“Estimation Removal ” function. The measurement is displayed based
on the damping value defined through the programming (1, 2 or 3) of
the “Surface elaboration coefficient”.
Note: programming 3 is wrong in the example proposed: the
measurement damping speed is slower than the stock removal.
Programmings 1 and 2 are correct.

10.2.6.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
parameters (A)
Measure Time (B)s No No No Yes Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application

configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).
These parameters take a different meaning and value depending on the
“Surface elaboration coefficient” (1, 2, 3) programmed.
B Measure times (programmable parameters)
Surface elaboration coefficient
1 2 3

= 7 ms 4 = 10 ms 4
Latency Time Yes Yes Yes
= 60 ms 4 = 40 ms 4
Measure Time Yes Yes Yes
4 Default values

146 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

 Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.

Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time

during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

“Surface Elaboration Type ” = workpiece with keyway

Normal keyway: program the data to “zero”.
Keyway with chamfered entry (the jump of the contact in the air is not rapid and
could be not detected, causing in this way possible problems to the correct
measurement of the workpiece): program the time upon which the contact
remains on the full section. In this case the interruption in the measurement
detection is not determined by the contact entering the keyway, but on a timing
basis.

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).
These parameters take a different value depending on the programming of the
“Surface elaboration type” and “Surface elaboration coefficient” parameters (1,
2, 3).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 147

10.2.6.2. Adjusting the surface processing
By adjusting the surface processing the filtering of the measurement bounces (that
occur when the contact comes in contact with the workpiece).
Manual operating mode.

Enter

Surface adjust value (-10 to + 10)

Diameter 1 Diameter 2

Press to switch
from Diameter 1 to
Diameter 2

Measurement numerical value

Bargraph of measurement

Damping may be adjusted for both diameters and with independent values: with the
page icon highlighted, press to switch from Diameter 1 to Diameter 2 .

Select the Part/Cycle (see section 6.3 on page 34) and bring the measuring head to
gauging position with the workpiece rotating.

1. Press to highlight the “Surface Adjust” value.

2. Press or to change the value (range ±10) until the measurement is

stable.

3. Press . When exiting this page (by pressing ) the system asks to
confirm: highlight “Yes” and press .

148 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

10.2.7. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option)
It allows determining (using just one contact – T1) the eccentricity error of the
workpiece as to the correct rotation axis.
Upon Programming the TIR option can be enabled or disabled and its characteristics
be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the TIR
measurement data.

TIR control enabled

TIR control disabled

Enabling/Disabling TIR control

Press to highlight the item “Tir” and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).

Note: The TIR check can NOT be enabled with “Surface elaboration type” =
or .

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).
TIR Control value beyond which the T.I.R. measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.
Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The “TIR Rpm” data is not programmable anymore.
TIR Rpm rotation speed of the workpiece during T.I.R. measurement.
TIR Delay time delay before taking the T.I.R. measurement.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 149

10.2.8. Ovality (Option)
Check of workpiece ovality.
Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).
Upon Programming the Ovality option can be enabled or disabled and its
characteristics be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the
ovality measurement data.

Ovality control enabled

Ovality control disabled

Enter

Parameters of the integral measurement

Enabling/Disabling Ovality control

Press to highlight the item “Ovality” and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).

Note: The Ovality check can NOT be enabled with “Surface elaboration type” =
or .

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

150 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

 Ovality Control Value beyond which the ovality measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: highlight the check-box and press .

10.2.8.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of integral measurement (section 10.2.4 “Integral
measurement”, page 136) and/or from the page of ”Removal speed control”, if
present (section 10.2.9, page 152).

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not programmable
anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing). See the description
of the “Estimated Removal” function on page 138.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 151

10.2.9. Stock Removal Speed Control (Adaptive Cycle) (Option)
It monitors the stock removal rate of the workpiece. When the rate falls above or
below the control limits a signal is sent to the machine’s logic system.
Upon Programming the Stock Removal Speed option can be enabled or disabled and
its characteristics be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the stock
removal speed control (Adaptive Cycle) data.

Removal speed control enabled

Removal speed control disabled

Enter

Parameters of the integral measurement

Enabling/Disabling Removal speed control

Press to highlight the item “Removal speed” and press to change its
status (enabled/disabled).

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Remspeed Control 1 Lower programmed control point.

Remspeed Control 2 Upper programmed control point.

152 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

 The Gauge gives the machine’s logic information about stock removal in time
(µm/s) through the status (on/off) of Remspeed 1 and Remspeed 2 control points.

Remspeed Control 1 Remspeed Control 2

OFF OFF Excessive removal

ON OFF Removal OK
ON ON Insufficient removal

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: highlight the check-box and press .

10.2.9.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of integral measurement (section 10.2.4 “Integral
measurement”, page 136) and/or from the page of ”Ovality control”, if present (section
10.2.8, page 150).

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not programmable
anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing). See the description
of the “Estimated Removal” function on page 138.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 153

10.2.10. Stock Removal (Option)
This option allows carrying out machining cycles in which a predetermined amount of
stock is removed, instead of reaching zero.
Upon Programming the “Stock removal” function can be enabled/disabled, and its
characteristics be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming; see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the stock
removal data.

Definition of stock removal type

Defining the type of stock removal

Enter
View the desired value using or , then press to confirm the selection:

DISABLED Stock removal function disabled (the actual stock of the

workpiece is removed).

ABSOLUTE Stock removal function enabled, with removal of a constant

amount of stock

PERCENTAGE Stock removal function enabled, with removal of a percentage

amount of stock

154 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

10.2.10.1. Removal of a constant amount of stock (ABSOLUTE)
Removal of a predetermined and constant amount of stock.

Stock Removal Amount Amount of stock to be removed (default value:

100µm).
For programming act as follows: highlight the involved field with , view the desired
Enter
value using or , then press to confirm.

Note: in case the electronic unit has been set up in order to receive the stock removal
from an external signal (BCD, Binary or Field Bus), the amount of stock to be
removed (Stock Removal Amount) cannot be programmed; the stock value is
received in Automatic mode before the cycle and concerns the selected set. Next to
the “ Stock Removal Amount” will be displayed the last stock removal value received
from the external signal.

10.2.10.2. Removal of a percentage amount of stock (PERCENTAGE)

Removal of a percentage amount of the detected stock.

Stock Removal Percentage Percentage of stock to be removed (1 to 99%).

Default value: 50%.
For programming act as follows: highlight the involved field with , view the desired
Enter
value using or , then press to confirm.

Note: in case the electronic unit has been set up in order to receive the stock removal
from an external signal (BCD, Binary or Field Bus), the percentage of stock to be
removed (Stock Removal Percentage) cannot be programmed; the stock pecentage
value is received in Automatic mode before the cycle and concerns the selected set.
Next to the “ Stock Removal Percentage” will be displayed the last stock removal
percentage value received from the external signal.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 155

10.2.11. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
We call Pulsed Feedback the measurement correction through “zero” shift determined
by pulses supplied through external logic unit.
Such a shift may be both positive and negative based on the type of pulse.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Pulsed Feedback” option and
define its characteristics.

Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the
Pulsed Feedback data.

Pulsed Feedback active

Pulsed Feedback not active

Pulsed Feedback enabling/disabling

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Feedback” and press to change its status
(active/not active).

Act as follows to program the data:

use to highlight the involved field, view the desired value with or , and
Enter
then press to confirm.

Pulse Weight minimum correction value (0 to 50 µm) performed at each pulse.

156 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

10.2.12. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
Correction of the In-Process measurement based on a determined Post-Process
measurement performed with Marposs gauge. The communication between the two
applications takes place through BCD/Binary interface.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “BCD Feedback” option and
define its characteristics.
Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the BCD
Feedback data.

BCD Feedback active

BCD Feedback not active

BCD Feedback enabling/disabling

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Feedback” and press to change its status
(active/not active).

Act as follows for programming:

use to highlight the involved field, view the desired value with or , and
then press to confirm.

Corr. Code request code associated with the measurement you want to correct
(combination of Post-Process measurement and the current In-Process
measurement). The default value is automatically generated when the set is
created based on the part code, cycle code and measurement code (A or B).
The In-Process set that shall perform the correction based on the measurement
performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same "Correction Code"
number of the Post-Process measurement associated.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 157

 Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

BCD
Feedback
The admissible "Correction code" values depend on the type of interface from
which the correction comes (interface type defined upon the configuration):
BCD interface: values between 1 and 79
Binary interface: values between 1 and 127

Interface number identification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which
the correction value comes. The maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is
fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).
The In-Process set that shall perform the correction based on the measurement
performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same "Interface Number"
of the Post-Process measurement associated.

Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

BCD
Feedback

158 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

10.2.13. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)
The Dirac application consists in the execution of the In-Process measurement of a
workpiece (typically an outside diameter) directly coupled with the Pre-Process
measurement of another workpiece (typically an inside diameter – hole).
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Dirac” option and define its
characteristics.
Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the Dirac
application data.

Dirac function active

Dirac function not active

Enabling/disabling the Dirac function

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Dirac” and press to change its status (
function active / function not active).

Act as follows to program the data:

use to highlight the involved field, or to view the desired value, then
Enter
press to confirm.

Correction Source the type of source of the correction values for the Dirac
function may be:

INTERNAL the correction comes from a set of the Post-Process type of the
same In-Process measurement CPU card that must carry out the
Dirac application.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 159

 Example of "INTERNAL source"

In-Process measurement Post-Process measurement

In-Process measurement
CPU card

EXTERNAL the correction comes from a Post-Process measurement processed

in a Post-Process measurement CPU card belonging to the different
equipment.
With correction source of the EXTERNAL type it is necessary to
program the "Interface number" data as well.

Example of "EXTERNAL source"

In-Process measurement
CPU card
P7 Post-Process Measurement

P7 In-Process Measurement
Post-Process
measurement CPU card

Correction Code request code associated with the measurement on which

you want to carry out the Dirac-type correction. The default value is automatically
generated when the set is created, based on the part code and cycle code.
With INTERNAL-type "Correction source":
the admissible "Correction code" values range between 1 and 127.
the "Correction code" of the set of the In-Process type that must carry out the
Dirac correction shall be the same of the associated set of the Post-Process
type that determines the correction value.

160 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

 Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process cycle Set

Dirac

With EXTERNAL-type "Correction source": the In-Process set that shall perform
the Dirac correction based on the measurement performed on a Post-Process
control plan shall have the same "Correction Code" number of the Post-Process
measurement associated.

Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

Dirac

The admissible "Correction code" values depend on the type of interface from
which the correction comes (interface type defined upon the configuration):
• BCD interface: values between 1 and 79
• Binary interface: values between 1 and 127.

Correction Sign selection of sign (+ or -) for the Dirac correction.

+ sign (default): standard Dirac application (Post-Process measurement inside
diameter / In-Process measurement outside diameter)
- sign: special Dirac application (the sign of the correction is inverted).
Example: Post-Process measurement outside diameter / In-Process
measurement inside diameter.

Interface Numberidentification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which the
Dirac correction comes (with EXTERNAL-type "Correction source" only). The
maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 161

 The In-Process set that shall perform the Dirac correction based on the
measurement performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same
"Interface Number" of the Post-Process measurement associated.

Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

Dirac

One correction at a cycle Dirac correction used either only once (for just one
cycle) or more times (for more cycles)
Dirac correction used for an In-Process cycle only
Dirac correction used for more In-Process cycles

162 Two Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

10.2.14. PP/IP coupling (Option)
Possibility of associating an In-Process diameter measurement to one or more
Pre/Post-Process measurements among the following ones:
• T.I.R. cycle
• Simple or double Post-Process diameter cycle
• Passive centering cycle
• Passive positioning cycle
During the execution of the cycle in automatic operating mode this function makes it
possible to monitor the value of the Pre/Post-Process measurements associated to it.
To associate the sets you just have to set the same code (1 to 31, necessarily
different from 0) in all the sets to be coupled.

Note: for the T.I.R. measurement it is not necessary to program a specific coupling
code since it is obtained as a cycle of the same set of the In-Process measurement
(see section 10.2.7 on page 149).

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of “PP/IP
coupling” application data.

Example: association of In-Process diameter / Passive Positioning measurement

Coupling Code code of association between the sets (1 to 31). Code “0” indicates
no association.
Enter
use or to view the desired value, then press to confirm.

The value of the associated measurements will be

visible, in automatic operating mode, in a single display
page. The measurements corresponding to nonexistent
sets or sets not associated with the corrent one are
displayed with --------- (see the example screen page).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 163

10.3. Two Diameters & Taper
This section covers programming the measurement application of TWO DIAMETERS
AND TAPER (Diameter 1 and Diameter 2) and its configured options.

Note: What is described in this section is also valid for the SINGLE DIAMETER
measurement application.

The example screens in this section show the single diameter cycle as Part Type 1,
Cycle 1, and the two diameters simultaneously cycle as Part 1 and Cycle 2.

In the rest of the chapter the example screens will be the ones of the pages relevant
to Diameter 1; the pages relevant to Diameter 2 are identical.

This measuring cycle can be defined with different Parts/Cycles as long as they
match with the machine logic programming.

Programming is performed in Manual mode only.

Enter
Select Programming folder and press .
The User’s Password is asked (if enabled):
Enter
- type the User’s Password and press to program/modify data ( ).
Enter
If you press without having typed the User’s Password you access the data
view-only environment ( ).

Note: The parameters relevant to the TWO DIAMETERS & TAPER measurement
application is independent for Diameter 1 and Diameter 2.

164 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.3.1. Two Diameters & Taper Menu Map
A B C D
Programming Enter
Request for: Manual operating mode. Press .
User’s Password
(if active) 1

Two Diameters & Taper

Use key to select:

Single Diameter Diameter 1 Diameter 2 Taper

2

Parameters/measurement options programming.

Programming is independent for Single Diameter, Diameter 1 and Diameter 2.
The programming pages are identical, only the icon of the page identifying the measurement type is 3
different.

Surface elaboration
(only if the measuring
function for interrupted Control points 4
surfaces is enabled). Section 10.3.6
Section 10.3.7
Options

TIR Stock removal speed 5

Section 10.3.8 control (Adaptive cycle)
Section 10.3.10

Ovality Stock Removal 6

Section 10.3.9 Section 10.3.11

Pulsed Feedback BCD Feedback 7

(Section 10.3.12) (Section 10.3.13)

Direct coupling –
PP/IP coupling 8
Dirac
(Section 10.3.14) (Section 10.3.15)

If any of these options are not installed, then the icon and the corresponding page are not seen.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 165

 Getting around the program
Enter
move down to the next level.

move up one level

move between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level.

10.3.1.1. Measurement optional functions (Options)

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions.

Function keys (F6 and F3) for

measurement optional function

If there are more than two optional functions (more function keys necessary) the F6
and F3 key have dynamic management. The “scroll” icon appears within the
key, beside the associated F# key number, to indicate that there are non-displayed
function keys. Highlight the key and use the and keys to scroll the list of the
measurement optional functions (represented by the relevant icons) available. Select
the optional function by pressing the F6 or F3 function key associated to the icon of
that function.

Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the measurement optional

functions present; an optional function is active when the box to the left of the
corresponding function key is full.
Example:

TIR optional function active

166 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.3.2. Programming of measurement parameters
Identical programming pages independent for each measurtement are available, only
the icon of the page identifying the measurement type is different: below there is the
page relevant to Diameter 1.

Selection/programming Measuring head sub-page

of zero shift (only with (definition of virtual head)
measuring heads
enabled for “zero shift”)

Measurement equation

Head number of the measuring head combined to the selected Set (part/cycle).

Nominal value nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”). (1)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within the zero shift
range (section 8.2.2.4 on page 43) based on the programmed ‘field center’ value
(section 8.3.1.2 on page 46).
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
Field center: 40,000 mm (programmed value)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within a range from
39,000mm to 41,000mm.

Master deviation the difference between the nominal value of master and the
gauged measurement of the workpiece used as such. (1)

Delay time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling to gauge for starting the measuring cycle. The
delay value is the same for Diameter 1 and Diameter 2.

To program the data, act as follows:

highlight the field with , view the desired value (or icon) with or and
press to confirm.
(1) Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to
Enter
be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust
values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 167

10.3.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition

To select/define a measuring head access the corresponding sub-page: use to

Enter
move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press .

Definition of virtual Measuring head sub-page

measuring head

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Head Measuring head number for the selected Set (part/cycle) depending on
the application characteristics.

Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to be

Enter
reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust
values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm /,0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0.00001” / 0.000001” / 0.0000001”
The possibility of changing the measure display resolution depends on the type of
application and measure range defined upon the application configuration stage
(see chapter 8.3.1.1 “Measurement viewing resolution ”, on page 46).
Note: The value of “Viewing resolution” is the same for Diameter 1 and
Diameter 2.

ABS View Selection of measure display modality (data valid only with “Zero shift”
enabled – Chapter 8.2.2, on page 41).
DISABLED: measure display in relative value

168 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

 Nominal Value: measure display in absolute value with reference to the nominal
diameter.
Field Center: measure display in absolute value with reference to the field center
value.
Examples

ABS View = Nominal Value (40.0000) ABS View = Field Center

Sensor Selection enables the selection of the sensors (S#) of different

measuring heads (definition of virtual or logic head).
Set the corresponding check box to ON (press with the cursor on the
corresponding field): it is enabled the selection of the sensors S#, among the ones
present in the application in use, to be combined with T1 and T2.
The “Head” data (physical head number) becomes meaningless (is underlit).

Definition of virtual measuring head – Sensors selection

Possibility of using for each measurement sensors belonging to different measuring
heads (definition of either a virtual or a logical head instead of a physical head) in
place of T1 and T2.

Use to move the cursor to (highlight) the field "T1 Sensor Code" / "T2 Sensor

Code", then use keys and to select the sensor number S# for T1 and for T2.

K Transducer coefficient. Value representing a coefficient of the contribution of

each individual sensor to the measurement.
Programmable between 0.001 and 100.000 (default value K=1.000).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 169

 In this way the virtual head for the selected set is defined.
In the different pages a physical head is indicated with a number between 1 and 4 (8
with expansion): the virtual head is indicated with letters X and Y.

Example
Measure B: measurement performed with physical head (2) - sensors T1/T2
Measure A: measurement performed with virtual head (X) – sensors S1/S4

Warnings !!
When checking the retraction of the sensors of a virtual head, if they belong to two
different physical heads, the remaining sensors belonging to the two physical heads
but not used for that virtual head are checked as well.
Example: when a pair of sensors type T1=S1 and T2=S3 is selected, and two sensors
(S1 and S2), are connected to the first little module, it is not possible to control the
retraction of S1 without the one of S2.
In the same way when acquiring (or resetting) the retraction threshold the physical
head is always considered, therefore if S4 and S7 are used in a virtual head also the
retraction thresholds S3 and S8 (if any) are acquired (or reset).
The zero corrections for the part -Part Adj (corrections involving all the cycles that
use the same head and belong to the same part) are not possible with virtual heads
(with physical heads only).
Example of typical application with virtual heads

170 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.3.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming
Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where it is possible to select/program the type of zero shift you want.

The state of the check boxes determines the selected zero shift.

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF (modalities not active).

Zero shift internally calculated based both on the

nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Note: The modality “ Internally calculated zero shift ” is disabled in case of virtual
measuring head (chapter 10.3.2.1”, on page 168).

Static self learning of zero shift

Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).
Modalities applicable in the following cases:
• sample part not rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth or grooved parts

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 171

 Dynamic self learning of zero shift
Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).

Modalities applicable in the following cases:

• sample part rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth parts
• integral measurement programmed

Note: in the case of master gauge rotating, but with grooved parts, it is necessary to
use the static self-learning modality anyway.

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press
with the cursor on the corresponding field).
For each contact of the measuring head it is
possible to define its own “Zero shift” value to be
used regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.
It is possible to program in T1 and T2 a value lower/equal to the zero shift range
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
T1 = ±1000µm / T2 = ±1000µm

Use to highlight the field T1 (Zero shift for T1) or T2 (Zero shift for T2), and then
program the zero shift values in the zero shift field (see 8.2.2, on page 41 and 8.2.2.4,
on page 43) of the measuring head used. (1)

(1) Note: Changing the value programmed for T1/T2 causes the measurement
Enter
calibration to be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to
exit without changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero
adjust values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

172 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.3.3. Measurement equation
Possibility of selecting the type (equation) of measurement.

The direction and the sign of the contacts T1 and T2 determine the measurement
value.
The following selections are available: T1, T2, -T1, -T2, T1+T2, T1-T2, -T1-T2, T2-T1

To select: highlight the involved field with , press to view the desired value,
and then press to confirm.

Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to be

Enter
reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust values
(programmed or from BCD) as well.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 173

10.3.4. Integral measurement
Function present, if enabled upon the application configuration stage.

Type of integral Enter

measurement

Parameters of the integral measurement

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average (if configured)

174 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

 The selection of the type of integral measurement is conditioned by the selected
“Surface Elaboration Type” (section 10.3.7, page 182).

Surface Elaboration Type

Type of
integral -------- --------
measure
-------- --------

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: highlight the check-box and press .

10.3.4.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of “Ovality” measurement, if present (section 10.3.9, page
190) and/or from the page of ”Removal speed control”, if present (section 10.3.10,
page 192).

Ovality Measurement Removal speed control

4
Enter

Enter Enter

Parameters of the integral

measurement

4 With “Type of integral measurement” = , the parameters of the integral

measurement concern just the “Ovality” measurement (if present) and/or the
“Removal speed control” (if present). Should these options be not present,
access to the page of the integral measurement parameters is disabled.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 175

 Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas.RPM” and “Rev.Percentage” are not programmable anymore.
Note: with “Type of integral measurement” = the processing requires a
minimum rotation speed during the cycle for being able to acquire the samples
required for the processing itself, so a speed of 10 RPM was adopted.
Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral
measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing).
With the check box enabled, successive measurement samples are processed so
as to display a continuous trend of the measurement itself. Thus the measurement
display is much more similar to the real trend of machining, allowing in this way a
more accurate control of the machining controls triggering and particularly of the
zero control.

Example of removal estimation processing (continuous curve)

Measurement trend (display) WITH “Removal

estimation” function

Measurement trend (display) WITHOUT

“Removal estimation” function

1, 2, 3, 4, -- measurement sampling points

(1-2), (2-3), -- straight line of interpolation between the corresponding
measurement points

176 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

 The measurement is not updated at each revolution of the workpiece, but
continuously: the trend of the measurement up to the successive measurement
sampling is defined based on the interpolation between two successive
measurement samples. A new interpolation between the last two samplings is
performed by defining the new measurement trend up to the next sampling, and so
on down to “zero”.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 177

10.3.5. Taper
Check of workpiece taper. Upon Programmaing the Taper check can be enabled or
disabled and the control points value be defined.
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of taper control points, pre-programmed
with a default value.

Taper enabled

Taper disabled

Control points relevant to taper

measurement (default values)

Enabling/Disabling Taper control

Press to highlight the item “Taper” and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).

10.3.5.1. Area controls relevant to taper measurement (Option)

If defined upon the application configuration, a page for the programming of the area
controls for taper measurement is available.

Access to the programming of the area controls for taper measurement.

Area controls relevant to taper

measurement (default values)

For each control it is necessary to program the interval of the taper measurement
where you want the control to be switched on (not self-latched controls).

178 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.3.5.2. Programming/changing value of Taper control points
To program/change the value of Taper control points, proceed as follows:

1. Press to highlight the control point to be programmed, and or to

display the desired value, then press
or

press to highlight the control point and

- use or to select the digit that needs changing and or display

the desired value (repeat for each digit that needs to be set).

- Press to save the new value.

2. Repeat step 1 for all control points to be programmed, then press .

10.3.5.3. Removing control points

To remove one or more control points act as follows:

1. Press to highlight the control point to be removed.

2. While holding down press . The control point is removed (No.

3. Press .

10.3.5.4. Restoring control points

To restore the control points previously removed, act as follows:

1. Press to highlight the control point to be restored

2. While holding down press . The control point is restored with the last
programmed value. If this value needs to be changed, follow the procedure to
program a control point.

3. Press .

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 179

10.3.6. Control Points
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of machining control points including a
zero control (the number of control points is defined at the application configuration
level).

10.3.6.1. Programming control points value

The control points are pre-programmed with a default value. The zero control cannot
be set since it concerns the final size of workpiece.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the control points programming page, press F4 or highlight

and press .
Default value of control
points

Viewing the position of

the different control
points

1. Press to highlight the control point, select the desired value with or
, then press .
or

press to highlight the control point, then .

- press or to select the digit that needs changing and or to

display the desired value (repeat for each digit that needs to be programmed).

- press .

2. Repeat step 1 for all control points to be programmed, then press .

Note: The control points must be programmed in increasing order from “zero”;
otherwise “Error 4” is displayed when exiting programming.

180 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.3.6.2. Removing control points
To remove one or more control points act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be removed.

2. While holding down press . The control point is removed (No) and
viewing of control points position is updated based on the remaining control
points.

3. Press .
Control points
disabled

10.3.6.3. Restoring control points

To restore the control points previously removed, act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be restored

2. While holding down press . The control point is restored with the last
programmed value. If this value needs to be changed, follow the procedure to
program a control point.

3. Press .

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 181

10.3.7. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
Access to the programming of the data relevant to the type of surface processing is
enabled only if the measurement of “interrupted surfaces” was enabled upon the
application configuration stage.
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the data relevant to the measurement of interrupted surfaces

press F5 or highlight and press .
Surface elaboration
Surface elaboration type coefficient
Integral measurement
type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

The programming / validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the
“Surface Elaboration Type ” selected (see the table below):
Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes Yes
Estim. Removal No Yes Yes No No

182 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

 Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Surface Elaboration Type Selection of the type of workpiece based on the

surface features (interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of
the measurement processing.

Smooth workpiece
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the
full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway
Inside diameter measurement (also while swinging). Option selectable
only if upon the configuration stage the corresponding measuring head
was configured for the measurement of inside diameters.

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).

“Surface Elaboration Type” = ” (smooth workpiece): the data is fixed at “1”.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated with three different damping speeds; the first above control
C2, the second between controls C2 and C1, the third below control C1 (see the
table below). Should the machining controls not be used, the points of damping
variation are fixed at +150µm and +50µm (measurement values).

Machining Surface elaboration coefficient

NO controls
controls 1 2 3
Damping speeds
480 µm/s 240 µm/s 128 µm/s
C2 +150 µm
120 µm/s 60 µm/s 32 µm/s
C1 +50µm
30 µm/s 15 µm/s 8 µm/s

High damping speed smaller damping

Low damping speed higher damping
The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3; the
higher the damping, the slower will be the measurement reduction. If damping is

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 183

 excessive, it might happen that during machining the wheel removes an amount of
stock higher than the gauged stock.
Therefore the damping speed shall be higher than the wheel feeding speed.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and

3) causes the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the
workpiece. The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for
coefficients 2 and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

Algorithm type The programmable algorithm type depends on the “Surface

elaboration coefficient” programmed.
Surface elaboration coefficient
Algorithm type
1 2 3
THRESHOLD Yes No No
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Yes Yes Yes
DERIVATE No Yes Yes

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory

Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.

HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside: it
can only run with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral
measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
Remind that there is just one digital clock signal available, so the measurement
processing with external synchronism can be performed either on the integral
measurement (see section 10.3.4 on page 174) or the surface processing.

DERIVATE – Derived memory

The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time. data).
See chapter 10.3.7.1, on page 186.

Once completed the correct programming of the surface processing coefficient,

should there be a measurement instability still present, it can be limited by
programming/changing the “Surface Adjust.” parameter (see section 10.3.7.2, page
188).

184 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

 Integral Measurement Type Selection of the type of integral measurement for the
period of validity of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing).
With the check box enabled, the measurement damping value does not depend
anymore on the “Surface elaboration coefficient” programmed (1, 2 or 3), but is
automatically calculated at each measurement interruption (interruption of the
workpiece).
The calculated damping value automatically matches each variation in the removal
speed.
Example of removal estimation processing for measurement of grooved
workpieces

Measurement trend (display) WITH

“Estimation Removal ” function

Display of the measurement with reference to

the transducer (display without damping)

1, 2, 3 Measurement trend (display) with programmed damping, WITHOUT

“Estimation Removal ” function. The measurement is displayed based
on the damping value defined through the programming (1, 2 or 3) of
the “Surface elaboration coefficient”.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 185

 Note: programming 3 is wrong in the example proposed: the
measurement damping speed is slower than the stock removal.
Programmings 1 and 2 are correct.

10.3.7.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
parameters (A)
Measure Times (B) No No No Yes Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application

configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).
These parameters take a different meaning and value depending on the
“Surface elaboration coefficient” (1, 2, 3) programmed.

B Measure times (programmable parameters)

Surface elaboration coefficient

1 2 3

= 7 ms 4 = 10 ms 4
Latency Time Yes Yes Yes
= 60 ms 4 = 40 ms 4
Measure Time Yes Yes Yes
4 Default values
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.

186 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

 Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

“Surface Elaboration Type ” = workpiece with keyway

Normal keyway: program the data to “zero”.
Keyway with chamfered entry (the jump of the contact in the air is not rapid and
could be not detected, causing in this way possible problems to the correct
measurement of the workpiece): program the time upon which the contact
remains on the full section. In this case the interruption in the measurement
detection is not determined by the contact entering the keyway, but on a timing
basis.

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).
These parameters take a different value depending on the programming of the
“Surface elaboration type” and “Surface elaboration coefficient” parameters (1,
2, 3).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 187

10.3.7.2. Adjusting the surface processing
By adjusting the surface processing the filtering of the measurement bounces (that
occur when the contact comes in contact with the workpiece).
Manual operating mode.

Enter

Surface adjust value (-10 to + 10)

Diameter 1 Diameter 2

Press to switch
from Diameter 1 to
Diameter 2

Measurement numerical value

Bargraph of measurement

Damping may be adjusted for both diameters and with independent values: with the
page icon highlighted, press to switch from Diameter 1 to Diameter 2 .

Select the Part/Cycle (see section 6.3 on page 34) and bring the measuring head to
gauging position with the workpiece rotating.

1. Press to highlight the “Surface Adjust” value.

2. Press or to change the value (range ±10) until the measurement is

stable.

3. Press . When exiting this page (by pressing ) the system asks to
confirm: highlight “Yes” and press .

188 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.3.8. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option)
It allows determining (using just one contact – T1) the eccentricity error of the
workpiece as to the correct rotation axis.
Upon Programming the TIR option can be enabled or disabled and its characteristics
be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the TIR
measurement data.

TIR control enabled

TIR control disabled

Enabling/Disabling TIR control

Press to highlight the item “Tir” and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).

Note: The TIR check can NOT be enabled with “Surface elaboration type” =
or .
Act as follows for programming data:
highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).
TIR Control Value beyond which the T.I.R. measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.
Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The “TIR Rpm” data is not programmable anymore.
TIR Rpm Rotation speed of the workpiece during T.I.R. measurement.
TIR Delay Time delay before taking the T.I.R. measurement.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 189

10.3.9. Ovality (Option)
Check of workpiece ovality.
Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).
Upon Programming the Ovality option can be enabled or disabled and its
characteristics be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the
ovality measurement data.

Ovality control enabled

Ovality control disabled

Enter

Parameters of the integral measurement

Enabling/Disabling Ovality control

Press to highlight the item “Ovality” and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).
Note: The Ovality check can NOT be enabled with “Surface elaboration type” =
or .

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

190 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

 Ovality Control Value beyond which the ovality measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: highlight the check-box and press .

10.3.9.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of integral measurement (section 10.3.4 “Integral
measurement”, page 174) and/or from the page of ”Removal speed control”, if
present (section 10.3.10, page 192).

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not programmable
anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing). See the description
of the “Estimated Removal” function on page 176.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 191

10.3.10. Stock Removal Speed Control (Adaptive Cycle) (Option)
It monitors the stock removal rate of the workpiece. When the rate falls above or
below the control limits a signal is sent to the machine’s logic system.
Upon Programming the Stock Removal Speed option can be enabled or disabled and
its characteristics be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the stock
removal speed control (Adaptive Cycle) data.

Removal speed control enabled

Removal speed control disabled

Enter

Parameters of the integral measurement

Enabling/Disabling Removal Speed control

Press to highlight the item “Removal Speed” and press to change its
status (enabled/disabled).

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Remspeed Control 1 lower programmed control point.

Remspeed Control 2 upper programmed control point.

192 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

 The gauge gives the machine’s logic information about stock removal in time
(µm/s) through the status (on/off) of Remspeed 1 and Remspeed 2 control points.

Remspeed Control 1 Remspeed Control 2

OFF OFF Excessive removal

ON OFF Removal OK
ON ON Insufficient removal

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: highlight the check-box and press .

10.3.10.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of integral measurement (section 10.3.4 “Integral
measurement”, page 174) and/or from the page of ”Ovality control”, if present (section
10.3.9, page 190).

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not programmable
anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing). See the description
of the “Estimated Removal” function on page 176.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 193

10.3.11. Stock Removal (Option)
This option allows carrying out machining cycles in which a predetermined amount of
stock is removed, instead of reaching zero.
Upon Programming the “Stock removal” function can be enabled/disabled, and its
characteristics be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming; see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the stock
removal data.

Definition of stock removal type

Defining the type of stock removal

Enter
View the desired value using or , then press to confirm the selection:

DISABLED Stock removal function disabled (the actual stock of the

workpiece is removed).

ABSOLUTE Stock removal function enabled, with removal of a constant

amount of stock

PERCENTAGE Stock removal function enabled, with removal of a percentage

amount of stock

194 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.3.11.1. Removal of a constant amount of stock (ABSOLUTE)
Removal of a predetermined and constant amount of stock.

Stock Removal Amount Amount of stock to be removed (default value:

100µm).
For programming act as follows: highlight the involved field with , view the desired
Enter
value using or , then press to confirm.

Note: in case the electronic unit has been set up in order to receive the stock removal
from an external signal (BCD, Binary or Field Bus), the amount of stock to be
removed (Stock Removal Amount) cannot be programmed; the stock value is
received in Automatic mode before the cycle and concerns the selected set. Next to
the “ Stock Removal Amount” will be displayed the last stock removal value received
from the external signal.

10.3.11.2. Removal of a percentage amount of stock (PERCENTAGE)

Removal of a percentage amount of the detected stock.

Stock Removal Percentage Percentage of stock to be removed (1 to 99%).

Default value: 50%.
For programming act as follows: highlight the involved field with , view the desired
Enter
value using or , then press to confirm.

Note: in case the electronic unit has been set up in order to receive the stock removal
from an external signal (BCD, Binary or Field Bus), the percentage of stock to be
removed (Stock Removal Percentage) cannot be programmed; the stock pecentage
value is received in Automatic mode before the cycle and concerns the selected set.
Next to the “ Stock Removal Percentage” will be displayed the last stock removal
percentage value received from the external signal.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 195

10.3.12. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
We call Pulsed Feedback the measurement correction through “zero” shift determined
by pulses supplied through external logic unit.
Such a shift may be both positive and negative based on the type of pulse.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Pulsed Feedback” option and
define its characteristics.

Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the
Pulsed Feedback data.

Pulsed Feedback active

Pulsed Feedback not active

Pulsed Feedback enabling/disabling

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Feedback” and press to change its status
(active/not active).

Act as follows to program the data:

use to highlight the involved field, view the desired value with or , and
Enter
then press to confirm.

Pulse Weight minimum correction value (0 to 50 µm) performed at each pulse.

196 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.3.13. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
Correction of the In-Process measurement based on a determined Post-Process
measurement performed with Marposs gauge. The communication between the two
applications takes place through BCD/Binary interface.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “BCD Feedback” option and
define its characteristics.
Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the BCD
Feedback data.

BCD Feedback active

BCD Feedback not active

BCD Feedback enabling/disabling

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Feedback” and press to change its status
(active/not active).

Act as follows for programming:

use to highlight the involved field, view the desired value with or , and
then press to confirm.

Corr. Code request code associated with the measurement you want to correct
(combination of Post-Process measurement and the current In-Process
measurement). The default value is automatically generated when the set is
created based on the part code, cycle code and measurement code (A or B).
The In-Process set that shall perform the correction based on the measurement
performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same "Correction Code"
number of the Post-Process measurement associated.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 197

 Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

BCD
Feedback
The admissible "Correction code" values depend on the type of interface from
which the correction comes (interface type defined upon the configuration):
BCD interface: values between 1 and 79
Binary interface: values between 1 and 127

Interface number identification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which
the correction value comes. The maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is
fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).
The In-Process set that shall perform the correction based on the measurement
performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same "Interface Number"
of the Post-Process measurement associated.

Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

BCD
Feedback

198 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.3.14. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)
The Dirac application consists in the execution of the In-Process measurement of a
workpiece (typically an outside diameter) directly coupled with the Pre-Process
measurement of another workpiece (typically an inside diameter – hole).
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Dirac” option and define its
characteristics.
Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the Dirac
application data.

Dirac function active

Dirac function not active

Enabling/disabling the Dirac function

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Dirac” and press to change its status (
function active / function not active).

Act as follows to program the data:

use to highlight the involved field, or to view the desired value, then
Enter
press to confirm.

Correction Source the type of source of the correction values for the Dirac
function may be:

INTERNAL the correction comes from a set of the Post-Process type of the
same In-Process measurement CPU card that must carry out the
Dirac application.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 199

 Example of "INTERNAL source"

In-Process measurement Post-Process measurement

In-Process measurement
CPU card

EXTERNAL the correction comes from a Post-Process measurement processed

in a Post-Process measurement CPU card belonging to the different
equipment.
With correction source of the EXTERNAL type it is necessary to
program the "Interface number" data as well.

Example of "EXTERNAL source"

In-Process measurement
CPU card
P7 Post-Process Measurement

P7 In-Process Measurement
Post-Process
measurement CPU card

Correction Code request code associated with the measurement on which

you want to carry out the Dirac-type correction. The default value is automatically
generated when the set is created, based on the part code and cycle code.
With INTERNAL-type "Correction source":
the admissible "Correction code" values range between 1 and 127.
the "Correction code" of the set of the In-Process type that must carry out the
Dirac correction shall be the same of the associated set of the Post-Process
type that determines the correction value.

200 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

 Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process cycle Set

Dirac

With EXTERNAL-type "Correction source": the In-Process set that shall perform
the Dirac correction based on the measurement performed on a Post-Process
control plan shall have the same "Correction Code" number of the Post-Process
measurement associated.

Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

Dirac

The admissible "Correction code" values depend on the type of interface from
which the correction comes (interface type defined upon the configuration):
• BCD interface: values between 1 and 79
• Binary interface: values between 1 and 127.

Correction Sign selection of sign (+ or -) for the Dirac correction.

+ sign (default): standard Dirac application (Post-Process measurement inside
diameter / In-Process measurement outside diameter)
- sign: special Dirac application (the sign of the correction is inverted).
Example: Post-Process measurement outside diameter / In-Process
measurement inside diameter.

Interface Numberidentification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which the
Dirac correction comes (with EXTERNAL-type "Correction source" only). The
maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 201

 The In-Process set that shall perform the Dirac correction based on the
measurement performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same
"Interface Number" of the Post-Process measurement associated.

Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

Dirac

One correction at a cycle Dirac correction used either only once (for just one
cycle) or more times (for more cycles)
Dirac correction used for an In-Process cycle only
Dirac correction used for more In-Process cycles

202 Two Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.3.15. PP/IP coupling (Option)
Possibility of associating an In-Process diameter measurement to one or more
Pre/Post-Process measurements among the following ones:
• T.I.R. cycle
• Simple or double Post-Process diameter cycle
• Passive centering cycle
• Passive positioning cycle
During the execution of the cycle in automatic operating mode this function makes it
possible to monitor the value of the Pre/Post-Process measurements associated to it.
To associate the sets you just have to set the same code (1 to 31, necessarily
different from 0) in all the sets to be coupled.

Note: for the T.I.R. measurement it is not necessary to program a specific coupling
code since it is obtained as a cycle of the same set of the In-Process measurement
(see section 10.3.8 on page 189).

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of “PP/IP
coupling” application data.

Example: association of In-Process diameter / Passive Positioning measurement

Coupling Code code of association between the sets (1 to 31). Code “0” indicates
no association.
Enter
use or to view the desired value, then press to confirm.

The value of the associated measurements will be

visible, in automatic operating mode, in a single display
page. The measurements corresponding to nonexistent
sets or sets not associated with the corrent one are
displayed with --------- (see the example screen page).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 203

10.4. Active positioning
This section covers the ACTIVE POSITIONING application and its configured options.
For this guide section the Active Positioning application has been programmed as
Part 1, Cycle 2 and Head 2.
The Active Positioning cycle can be defined with Parts/Cycles matching the
machine’s logic programming.

Programming is performed in Manual mode only.

Enter
Select Programming folder and press .
The User’s Password is asked (if enabled):
Enter
- type the User’s Password and press to program/modify data ( ).
Enter
If you press without having typed the User’s Password you access the data
view-only environment ( ).

204 Active positioning – Programming Manual

10.4.1. Active Positioning Menu Map

A B
Programming
Enter
Manual operating mode. Press .
FOLDER

Request for: 1
User’s Password (if active)

2
PAGES

“SELECTION” control points (1)

Section 10.4.3

Programming of measurement
parameters. Section 10.4.2.

3
((1) The type of control points depends
on the application configuration
“SELF-LOCKED” control points (1)
Section 10.4.3

Getting around the program

Enter
move down to the next level.

move up one level. 4

Surface elaboration
move between folders, sub-
folders or pages on the same level. Only if the measurement function for
interrupted surfaces is enabled, see
section 10.4.4 page 213

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 205

10.4.2. Programming of measurement parameters

Selection/programming
of zero shift (only with Measuring head sub-page
measuring heads
enabled for “zero shift”)

Head Number of the measuring head combined to the selected Set (part/cycle).

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”).

Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to be

Enter
reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust
values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

The nominal value of the measurement must be included within the zero shift
range (section 8.2.2.4 on page 43) based on the programmed ‘field center’ value
(section 8.3.1.2 on page 46).
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
Field center: 40,000 mm (programmed value)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within a range from
39,000mm to 41,000mm.

Positioning Mode Contact positioning movement (Release = the workpiece

moves far from the contact; Press = the workpiece moves towards the contact).
Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling sent to gauge for starting the measuring cycle.

To program the data, proceed as follows:

highlight the field with , view the desired value (or icon) with or , then
press to confirm.

206 Active positioning – Programming Manual

10.4.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition

To select/define a measuring head access the corresponding sub-page: use to

Enter
move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press .

Measuring head sub-page

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Head Measuring head number for the selected Set (part/cycle) depending on
the application characteristics. (1)

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system : 1 µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0,00001” / 0,000001” / 0,0000001”
The possibility of changing the measure display resolution depends on the type of
application and measure range defined upon the application configuration stage
(see chapter 8.3.1.1 “Measurement viewing resolution ”, on page 46).

Sensor Choice (with two-sensor measuring head). Choice of the sensor to be

used for the positioning cycle. The symbol identifies the selected sensor [S#].
(1)

ABS View Selection of measure display modality (data valid only with “Zero shift”
enabled – Chapter 8.2.2, on page 41).
DISABLED: measure display in relative value
Nominal Value: measure display in absolute value with reference to the nominal
diameter.
Field Center: measure display in absolute value with reference to the field center
value.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 207

 Examples

ABS View = Nominal Value (40.0000) ABS View = Field Center

(1) Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to
Enter
be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust values
(programmed or from BCD) as well.

10.4.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming

Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where it is possible to select/program the type of zero shift you want.

The state of the check boxes determines the selected zero shift.

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF (modalities not active).

Zero shift internally calculated based both on the

nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

208 Active positioning – Programming Manual

 Static self learning of zero shift
Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).
Modalities applicable in the following cases:
• sample part not rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth or grooved parts

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

Note
The modality “Static self-learning zero shift” is not always applicable in the case of
measurement on interrupted (grooved) surfaces: the electric zero-setting of the
measurement is incorrectly performed (electric zero-setting error).
In this case it is necessary to select the modality “Programmed zero shift”.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press
with the cursor on the corresponding field).
For each contact of the measuring head it is
possible to define its own “Zero shift” value to be
used regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.
It is possible to program in T1 a value lower/equal to the zero shift range
Example: Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data) T1 = ±1000µm

Use to highlight the field T1 (Zero shift for T1), and then program the zero shift
values in the zero shift field (see 8.2.2, on page 41 and 8.2.2.4, on page 43) of the
measuring head used. (1)

(1) Note: Changing the value programmed for T1 causes the measurement
Enter
calibration to be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to
exit without changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero
adjust values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 209

10.4.3. Control points
The controls may be of either “SELF-LOCKED” or “SELECTION” (non self-locked) type:
type of controls for the application in use is chosen at the configuration level.
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of positioning control points, including a
zero control (the number of control points is defined at the configuration level).

10.4.3.1. Programming/changing Control points value

The control points are pre-programmed with a default value.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the control points programming page, press F4 or highlight

and press .

Self-locked control points

Default value of
control points

Viewing of self-locked
control points position

The zero control cannot be set since it concerns the final position of workpiece.

Note: The self-locked control points must be programmed in increasing order

from “zero”; otherwise “Error 4” is displayed when exiting programming.

210 Active positioning – Programming Manual

 SELECTION control points

Default value of control

points

Viewing of selection
control points position

Note: The selection control points must be programmed in increasing order from
control point “1”; otherwise “Error 4” is displayed when exiting
programming.

To program/change the value of control points (SELF-LOCKED or SELECTION), act as

follows:

1. Press to highlight the control point to be programmed, view the desired

value with or , then press
or

press to highlight the control point, then .

- press or to select the digit that needs changing and or , to

view the desired value (repeat for all the digits to be set).

- press to save the new value.

2. Repeat step 1 for all the control points to be programmed, then press .

10.4.3.2. Removing control points

To remove one or more control points act as follows:

1. Press to highlight the control point to be removed.

2. While holding down press . The control point is removed (No) and
viewing of control points position is updated based on the remaining control
points.

3. Press .

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 211

 Control point
disabled

SELF-LOCKED control points SELECTION control points

10.4.3.3. Restoring control points

To restore the control points previously removed, act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be restored.

2. While holding down press . The control point is restored with the last
programmed value. If this value needs to be changed, follow the procedure to
program a control point.

3. Press .

212 Active positioning – Programming Manual

10.4.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
Access to the programming of the data relevant to the type of surface processing is
enabled only if the measurement of “interrupted surfaces” was enabled upon the
application configuration stage.
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the data relevant to the measurement of interrupted surfaces

Enter
press F5 or highlight and press .
Surface elaboration
Surface elaboration type
coefficient

Integral measurement type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

The programming / validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the
“Surface Elaboration Type ” selected (see the table below):
Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 213

 Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Surface Elaboration Type Selection of the type of workpiece based on the

surface features (interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of
the measurement processing.

Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).

“Surface Elaboration Type” = ” (smooth workpiece): the data is fixed at “1”.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated with three different damping speeds; the first above control
C2, the second between controls C2 and C1, the third below control C1 (see the
table below). Should the machining controls not be used, the points of damping
variation are fixed at +150µm and +50µm (measurement values).

Machining Surface elaboration coefficient

NO controls
controls 1 2 3
Damping speeds
480 µm/s 240 µm/s 128 µm/s
C2 +150 µm
120 µm/s 60 µm/s 32 µm/s
C1 +50µm
30 µm/s 15 µm/s 8 µm/s

High damping speed smaller damping

Low damping speed higher damping
The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3; the
higher the damping, the slower will be the measurement reduction. If damping is
excessive, it might happen that during machining the wheel removes an amount of
stock higher than the gauged stock.

214 Active positioning – Programming Manual

 Therefore the damping speed shall be higher than the wheel feeding speed.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3)

causes the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the
workpiece. The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for
coefficients 2 and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

Algorithm type The programmable algorithm type depends on the “Surface

elaboration coefficient” programmed.
Surface elaboration coefficient
Algorithm type
1 2 3
THRESHOLD Yes No No
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Yes Yes Yes
DERIVATE No Yes Yes

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory

Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.

HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside: it
can only run with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral
measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)

DERIVATE – Derived memory

The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time. data).
See chapter 10.4.4.1, on page 216.

Once completed the correct programming of the surface processing coefficient,

should there be a measurement instability still present, it can be limited by
programming/changing the “Surface Adjust.” parameter (see section 10.4.4.2, page
218).

Integral Measurement Type Selection of the type of integral measurement for the
period of validity of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 215

 Processing of the Minimum value
Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

10.4.4.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes
parameters (A)
Measure Time (B)s No No No Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes

A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application

configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).
These parameters take a different meaning and value depending on the
“Surface elaboration coefficient” (1, 2, 3) programmed.

B Measure times (programmable parameters)

Surface elaboration coefficient

1 2 3
Latency Time Yes Yes = 7 ms 4 Yes = 10 ms 4
Measure Time Yes Yes Yes
4 Default values

216 Active positioning – Programming Manual

 Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.

Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time

during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

“Surface Elaboration Type ” = workpiece with keyway

Normal keyway: program the data to “zero”.
Keyway with chamfered entry (the jump of the contact in the air is not rapid and
could be not detected, causing in this way possible problems to the correct
measurement of the workpiece): program the time upon which the contact
remains on the full section. In this case the interruption in the measurement
detection is not determined by the contact entering the keyway, but on a timing
basis.

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).
These parameters take a different value depending on the programming of the
“Surface elaboration type” and “Surface elaboration coefficient” parameters (1,
2, 3).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 217

10.4.4.2. Adjusting the surface processing
By adjusting the surface processing the filtering of the measurement bounces (that
occur when the contact comes in contact with the workpiece).
Manual operating mode.

Enter

Surface adjust value (-10 to + 10)

Numerical value of
measurement

Bargraph of measurement

Select the Part/Cycle (see section 6.3 on page 34) and bring the measuring head to
gauging position with the workpiece rotating.

1. Press to highlight the “Surface Adjust” value.

2. Press or , to change the value (range ±10) until the measurement is

stable.

3. Press . When exiting the page (by pressing ) the system asks to confirm:
highlight “Yes” and press .

218 Active positioning – Programming Manual

10.5. Active centering
This section covers the ACTIVE CENTERING application and its configured options.
For this guide section the Active centering application has been programmed as Part
1, Cycle 1 and Head 1.
The Active Centering cycle can be defined with Parts/Cycles matching the machine’s
logic programming.

Programming is performed in Manual mode only.

Enter
Select Programming folder and press .
The User’s Password is asked (if enabled):
Enter
- type the User’s Password and press to program/modify data ( ).
Enter
If you press without having typed the User’s Password you access the data
view-only environment ( ).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 219

10.5.1. Active centering Menu Map

A B
Programming
Enter
Manual operating mode. Press .
Request for:
FOLDER

User’s Password (if active)

1

2
PAGES

“SELECTION” control points (1)

Section 10.5.3

Programming of measurement
parameters. Section 10.5.2.

3
((1) The type of control points depends
on the application configuration
“SELF-LOCKED” control points (1)
Section 10.5.3

Getting around the program

Enter
move down to the next level. 4
move up one level.
Surface elaboration
move between folders, sub- Only if the measurement function for
folders or pages on the same level. interrupted surfaces is enabled, see
section 10.5.4 page 228.

220 Active centering – Programming Manual

10.5.2. Programming of measurement parameters

Selection/programming
Measuring head sub-page
of zero shift (only with
measuring heads
enabled for “zero shift”)

Head Number of the measuring head combined to the selected Set (part/cycle).

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”).

Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to be

Enter
reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust
values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

The nominal value of the measurement must be included within the zero shift
range (section 8.2.2.4 on page 43) based on the programmed ‘field center’ value
(section 8.3.1.2 on page 46).
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
Field center: 40,000 mm (programmed value)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within a range from
39,000mm to 41,000mm.

Centering Mode Contact centering movement (Release = the workpiece moves far
from the contact; Press = the workpiece moves towards the contact).

Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling sent to gauge for starting the measuring cycle.

To program the data, proceed as follows:

highlight the field with , view the desired value (or icon) with or , then
Enter
press to confirm.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 221

10.5.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition

To select/define a measuring head access the corresponding sub-page: use to

Enter
move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press .

Measuring head sub-page

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Head Measuring head number for the selected Set (part/cycle) depending on
the application characteristics.
Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to be
Enter
reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust
values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0,00001” / 0,000001” / 0,0000001”
The possibility of changing the measure display resolution depends on the type of
application and measure range defined upon the application configuration stage
(see chapter 8.3.1.1 “Measurement viewing resolution ”, on page 46).

ABS View Selection of measure display modality (data valid only with “Zero shift”
enabled – Chapter 8.2.2, on page 41).
DISABLED: measure display in relative value
Nominal Value: measure display in absolute value with reference to the nominal
diameter.
Field Center: measure display in absolute value with reference to the field center
value.

222 Active centering – Programming Manual

 Examples

ABS View = Nominal Value (40.0000) ABS View = Field Center

10.5.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming

Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.
Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where it is possible to select/program the type of zero shift you want.

The state of the check boxes determines the selected zero shift.

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based both on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Static self-learning zero shift

Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).
Modalities applicable in the following cases:
• sample part not rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth or grooved parts

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 223

 Set the corresponding check box to ON (press
with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

Note
The modality “Static self-learning zero shift” is not always applicable in the case of
measurement on interrupted (grooved) surfaces: the electric zero-setting of the
measurement is incorrectly performed (electric zero-setting error).
In this case it is necessary to select the modality “Programmed zero shift”.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press
with the cursor on the corresponding field).
For each contact of the measuring head it is
possible to define its own “Zero shift” value to be
used regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.
It is possible to program in T1 and T2 a value lower/equal to the zero shift range
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
T1 = ±1000µm / T2 = ±1000µm

Use to highlight the field T1 (Zero shift for T1) or T2 (Zero shift for T2), and then
program the zero shift values in the zero shift field (see 8.2.2, on page 41 and 8.2.2.4,
on page 43) of the measuring head used. (1)

(1) Note: Changing the value programmed for T1/T2 causes the measurement
Enter
calibration to be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to
exit without changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero
adjust values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

224 Active centering – Programming Manual

10.5.3. Control points
The controls may be of either “SELF-LOCKED” or “SELECTION” (non self-locked) type:
type of controls for the application in use is chosen at the configuration level.
The Gauge is configured with a fixed number of centering control points, including a
zero control (the number of control points is defined at the configuration level).

10.5.3.1. Programming/changing control points value

The control points are pre-programmed with a default value.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the control points programming page, press F4 or highlight

and press .

Self-locked control points

Default value of
control points

Viewing of self-locked
control points position

The zero control cannot be set since it concerns the final position of workpiece.

Note: The self-locked control points must be programmed in increasing order

from “zero”; otherwise “Error 4” is displayed when exiting programming.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 225

 SELECTION control points

Default value of control

points

Viewing of selection
control points position

Note: The selection control points must be programmed in increasing order from
control point “1”; otherwise “Error 4” is displayed when exiting
programming.

To program/change the value of control points (SELF-LOCKED or SELECTION), act as

follows:

1. Press to highlight the control point to be programmed, view the desired

Enter
value with or , then press
or
Enter
press to highlight the control point, then .

- press or to select the digit that needs changing and or to

view the desired value (repeat for all the digits to be set).
Enter
- press to save the new value.

2. Repeat step 1 for all the control points to be programmed, then press .

10.5.3.2. Removing control points

To remove one or more control points act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be removed.

Shift Enter
2. While holding down press . The control point is removed (No) and
viewing of control points position is updated based on the remaining control
points.

3. Press .

226 Active centering – Programming Manual

 Control point
disabled

SELF-LOCKED control points SELECTION control points

10.5.3.3. Restoring control points

To restore the control points previously removed, act as follows:

1. Press to highlight the control point to be restored.

Shift Enter
2. While holding down press . The control point is restored with the last
programmed value. If this value needs to be changed, follow the procedure to
program a control point.

3. Press .

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 227

10.5.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
Access to the programming of the data relevant to the type of surface processing is
enabled only if the measurement of “interrupted surfaces” was enabled upon the
application configuration stage.
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the data relevant to interrupted surfaces measurement data press

F5 or highlight and press .

Surface elaboration
Surface elaboration type
coefficient

Integral measurement type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

The programming / validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the
“Surface Elaboration Type ” selected (see the table below):
Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes

228 Active centering – Programming Manual

 Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Surface Elaboration Type Selection of the type of workpiece based on the

surface features (interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of
the measurement processing.

Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).

“Surface Elaboration Type” = ” (smooth workpiece): the data is fixed at “1”.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated with three different damping speeds; the first above control
C2, the second between controls C2 and C1, the third below control C1 (see the
table below). Should the machining controls not be used, the points of damping
variation are fixed at +150µm and +50µm (measurement values).

Machining Surface elaboration coefficient

NO controls
controls 1 2 3
Damping speeds
480 µm/s 240 µm/s 128 µm/s
C2 +150 µm
120 µm/s 60 µm/s 32 µm/s
C1 +50µm
30 µm/s 15 µm/s 8 µm/s

High damping speed smaller damping

Low damping speed higher damping
The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3; the
higher the damping, the slower will be the measurement reduction. If damping is
excessive, it might happen that during machining the wheel removes an amount of
stock higher than the gauged stock.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 229

 Therefore the damping speed shall be higher than the wheel feeding speed.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3)

causes the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the
workpiece. The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for
coefficients 2 and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

Algorithm types The programmable algorithm type depends on the “Surface

elaboration coefficient” programmed.
Surface elaboration coefficient
Algorithm type
1 2 3
THRESHOLD Yes No No
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Yes Yes Yes
DERIVATE No Yes Yes

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory

Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.

HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside: it
can only run with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral
measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)

DERIVATE – Derived memory

The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 10.5.4.1, on page 231.

Once completed the correct programming of the surface processing coefficient,

should there be a measurement instability still present, it can be limited by
programming/changing the “Surface Adjust.” parameter (see section 10.5.4.2, page
233).

Integral Measurement Type Selection of the type of integral measurement for the
period of validity of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

230 Active centering – Programming Manual

 Processing of the Minimum value
Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

10.5.4.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes
parameters (A)
Measure Times (B) No No No Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes

A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application

configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).
These parameters take a different meaning and value depending on the
“Surface elaboration coefficient” (1, 2, 3) programmed.

B Measure times (programmable parameters)

Surface elaboration coefficient

1 2 3
Latency Time Yes Yes = 7 ms 4 Yes = 10 ms 4
Measure Time Yes Yes Yes
4 Default values

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 231

 Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.

Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time

during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

“Surface Elaboration Type ” = workpiece with keyway

Normal keyway: program the data to “zero”.
Keyway with chamfered entry (the jump of the contact in the air is not rapid and
could be not detected, causing in this way possible problems to the correct
measurement of the workpiece): program the time upon which the contact
remains on the full section. In this case the interruption in the measurement
detection is not determined by the contact entering the keyway, but on a timing
basis.

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).
These parameters take a different value depending on the programming of the
“Surface elaboration type” and “Surface elaboration coefficient” parameters (1,
2, 3).

232 Active centering – Programming Manual

10.5.4.2. Adjusting the surface processing
By adjusting the surface processing the filtering of the measurement bounces (that
occur when the contact comes in contact with the workpiece).
Manual operating mode.

Enter

Surface adjust value (-10 to + 10)

Numerical value of
measurement

Bargraph of measurement

Select the Part/Cycle (see section 6.3 page 34) and bring the measuring head to
gauging position with the workpiece rotating.

1. Press to highlight the “Surface Adjust” value.

2. Press or to change the value (range ±10) until the measurement is

stable.
Enter
3. Press . When exiting the page (by pressing ) the system asks to
Enter
confirm: highlight “Yes” and press .

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 233

10.6. Passive positioning
This section covers the PASSIVE POSITIONING application and its configured options.
For this guide section the Passive Positioning application has been programmed as
Part 1, Cycle 1 and Head 1.
The Passive Positioning cycle can be defined with Parts/Cycles matching the
machine’s logic programming.

Programming is performed in Manual mode only.

Enter
Select Programming folder and press .
The User’s Password is asked (if enabled):
Enter
- type the User’s Password and press to program/modify data ( ).
Enter
If you press without having typed the User’s Password you access the data
view-only environment ( ).

234 Passive positioning – Programming Manual

10.6.1. Passive Positioning Menu Map

Programming
Enter
Manual operating mode. Press .
FOLDER

Request for:
User’s Password (if active)

Programming of measurement
parameters. Section 10.6.2.
PAGES

Measurement overrange PP/IP coupling (Option).

values programming. See section 10.6.6 on page 249.
Section 10.6.3

Integral measurement
programming (if enabled).
Section 10.6.4

Surface elaboration
Getting around the program Only if the measurement function for
interrupted surfaces is enabled. See
Enter section 10.6.5 on page 244.
move down to the next level.

move up one level.

move between folders, sub-folders

or pages on the same level.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 235

10.6.2. Programming of measurement parameters
Selection/programming of
zero shift (only with Measuring head sub-page
measuring heads enabled
for “zero shift”)

Head Number of the measuring head combined to the selected Set (part/cycle).

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”).
Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to be
Enter
reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust
values (programmed or from BCD) as well.
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within the zero shift
range (section 8.2.2.4 on page 43) based on the programmed ‘field center’ value
(section 8.3.1.2 on page 46).
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
Field center: 40,000 mm (programmed value)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within a range from
39,000mm to 41,000mm.

Measure Sign Selection of measurement sign (+ = normal measurement,

− = inverted measurement).

Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling sent to P7 for starting the measuring cycle.

To program the data, proceed as follows:

highlight the field with , view the desired value (or icon) with or , then
Enter
press to confirm.

236 Passive positioning – Programming Manual

10.6.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition

To select/define a measuring head access the corresponding sub-page: use to

Enter
move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press .:

Measuring head sub-page

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Head Measuring head number for the selected Set (part/cycle) depending on
the application characteristics.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm /0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0,00001” / 0,000001” / 0,0000001”
The possibility of changing the measure display resolution depends on the type of
application and measure range defined upon the application configuration stage
(see chapter 8.3.1.1 “Measurement viewing resolution ”, on page 46).

Sensor Choice (with two-sensor measuring head). Choice of the sensor to be

used for the positioning cycle. The symbol identifies the selected sensor [S#].
(1)

ABS View Selection of measure display modality (data valid only with “Zero shift”
enabled – Chapter 8.2.2, on page 41).
DISABLED: measure display in relative value
Nominal Value: measure display in absolute value with reference to the nominal
diameter.
Field Center: measure display in absolute value with reference to the field center
value.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 237

 Examples

ABS View = Nominal Value (40.0000) ABS View = Field Center

(1) Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to
Enter
be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust
values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

238 Passive positioning – Programming Manual

10.6.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming
Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where it is possible to select/program the type of zero shift you want.

The state of the check boxes determines the selected zero shift.

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based both on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Static self-learning zero shift

Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).
Modalities applicable in the following cases:
• sample part not rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth or grooved parts

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 239

 Dynamic self learning of zero shift
Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).
Modalities applicable in the following cases:
• sample part rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth parts
• integral measurement programmed

Note: in the case of master gauge rotating, but with grooved parts, it is necessary to
use the static self-learning modality anyway.

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press
with the cursor on the corresponding field).
For each contact of the measuring head it is
possible to define its own “Zero shift” value to be
used regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.
It is possible to program in T1 a value lower/equal to the zero shift range
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
T1 = ±1000µm

Use to highlight the field T1 (Zero shift for T1), and then program the zero shift
values in the zero shift field (see 8.2.2, on page 41 and 8.2.2.4, on page 43) of the
measuring head used. (1)

(1) Note: Changing the value programmed for T1 causes the measurement
Enter
calibration to be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to
exit without changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero
adjust values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

240 Passive positioning – Programming Manual

10.6.3. Positioning Over Range values
Definition of the range where a Passive Positioning cycle can be performed. The
programmed values must be within the working range of the measuring head.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the overrange limits and program
the threshold values.

Overrange control enabled

Overrange control disabled

Enabling/Disabling Overrange (OVR) limits

Enter
Press to highlight the box and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).

+OVR Definition of the positive threshold beyond which the measurement is

overrange.
-OVR Definition of the negative threshold beyond which the measurement is
overrange.

To program the data, proceed as follows:

Enter
highlight the field with , view the desired valuewith or , then press
to confirm.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 241

10.6.4. Integral measurement
Function present if enabled upon the application configuration stage.

Type of integral Enter

measurement

Parameters of the integral measurement

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average (if configured)

242 Passive positioning – Programming Manual

 The selection of the type of integral measurement is conditioned by the selected
“Surface Elaboration Type” (see section 10.6.5, page 244).

Surface Elaboration Type

Type of
integral -------- --------
measure
-------- --------

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: highlight the check-box and press .

With “Type of integral measurement” = access to the page of the integral

measurement parameters is disabled.

10.6.4.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not programmable
anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 243

10.6.5. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
Access to the programming of the data relevant to the type of surface processing is
enabled only if the measurement of “interrupted surfaces” was enabled upon the
application configuration stage.
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the data relevant to the measurement of interrupted surfaces

press F5 or highlight and press .

Surface elaboration
Surface elaboration type coefficient

Integral measurement type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

The programming / validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the
“Surface Elaboration Type ” selected (see the table below):
Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes

244 Passive positioning – Programming Manual

 Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Surface Elaboration Type Selection of the type of workpiece based on the

surface features (interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of
the measurement processing.

Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).

“Surface Elaboration Type” = ” (smooth workpiece): the data is fixed at “1”.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated a different damping speed.

Surface elaboration coefficient

1 2 3
Damping speed
30 µm/s 15 µm/s 8 µm/s

High damping speed smaller damping

Low damping speed higher damping

The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3; the

higher the damping, the slower will be the measurement reduction.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3) causes

the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the workpiece.
The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for coefficients 2
and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 245

 Algorithm type The programmable algorithm type depends on the “Surface
elaboration coefficient” programmed.
Surface elaboration coefficient
Algorithm type
1 2 3
THRESHOLD Yes No No
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Yes Yes Yes
DERIVATE No Yes Yes

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory

Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.

HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside: it
can only run with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral
measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
Remind that there is just one digital clock signal available, so the measurement
processing with external synchronism can be performed either on the integral
measurement (see section 10.6.4 on page 95) or the surface processing.

DERIVATE – Derived memory

The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 10.6.5.1, on page 247.

Once completed the correct programming of the surface processing coefficient,

should there be a measurement instability still present, it can be limited by
programming/changing the “Surface Adjust.” parameter (see section 10.6.5.2, page
248).

Integral Measurement Type Selection of the type of integral measurement for the
period of validity of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

246 Passive positioning – Programming Manual

 Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

10.6.5.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes
parameters (A)
Measure Times (B) No No No Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes

A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application

configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).
These parameters take a different meaning and value depending on the
“Surface elaboration coefficient” (1, 2, 3) programmed.

B Measure times (programmable parameters)

Surface elaboration coefficient

1 2 3
Latency Time Yes Yes = 7 ms 4 Yes = 10 ms 4
Measure Time Yes Yes Yes
4 Default values
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 247

 Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

“Surface Elaboration Type ” = workpiece with keyway

Normal keyway: program the data to “zero”.
Keyway with chamfered entry (the jump of the contact in the air is not rapid and
could be not detected, causing in this way possible problems to the correct
measurement of the workpiece): program the time upon which the contact
remains on the full section. In this case the interruption in the measurement
detection is not determined by the contact entering the keyway, but on a timing
basis.

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).
These parameters take a different value depending on the programming of the
“Surface elaboration type” and “Surface elaboration coefficient” parameters (1,
2, 3).

10.6.5.2. Adjusting the surface processing

By adjusting the surface processing the filtering of the measurement bounces (that
occur when the contact comes in contact with the workpiece).
Manual operating mode.

Enter

Surface adjust value (-10 to + 10)

Numerical value of
measurement

Bargraph of measurement

Select the Part/Cycle (see section 6.3 on page 34) and bring the measuring head to
gauging position with the workpiece rotating.

1. Press to highlight the “Surface Adjust” value.

248 Passive positioning – Programming Manual

 2. Press or to change the value (range ±10) until the measurement is
stable.
Enter
3. Press . When exiting the page (by pressing ) the system asks to
Enter
confirm: highlight “Yes” and press .

10.6.6. PP/IP coupling (Option)

Association of the Passive Positioning measurement with an In-Process diameter
measurement (either simple or double).
To associate the sets you just have to set the same code (1 to 31, necessarily
different from 0) in all the sets to be coupled.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of “PP/IP
coupling” application data.

Example: association of Passive Positioning / In-Process diameter measurement

Coupling Code code of association between the sets (1 to 31). Code “0” indicates
no association.
Enter
use or to display the desired value, and then press to confirm.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 249

10.7. Passive centering
This section covers the PASSIVE CENTERING application and its configured options.
For this guide section the Passive Centering application has been programmed as
Part 1, Cycle 2 and Head 3.
The Passive Centering cycle can be defined with Parts/Cycles matching the
machine’s logic programming.

Programming is performed in Manual mode only.

Enter
Select Programming folder and press .
The User’s Password is asked (if enabled):
Enter
- type the User’s Password and press to program/modify data ( ).
Enter
If you press without having typed the User’s Password you access the data
view-only environment ( ).

250 Passive centering – Programming Manual

10.7.1. Passive Centering Menu Map

Programming
Enter
Manual operating mode. Press .
FOLDER

Request for:
User’s Password (if active)

Programming of measurement
parameters. Section 10.7.2.
PAGES

PP/IP coupling (Option).

Measurement overrange
values programming. See section 10.7.6 on page 266.
Section 10.7.3

Integral measurement
programming (if enabled).
Section 10.7.4

Surface elaboration
Getting around the program Only if the measurement function for
interrupted surfaces is enabled see
Enter
section 10.7.5 on page 260.
move down to the next level.

move up one level.

move between folders, sub-folders

or pages on the same level.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 251

10.7.2. Measuring head parameters programming

Selection/programming of
zero shift (only with Measuring head sub-page
measuring heads enabled
for “zero shift”)

Head Number of the measuring head combined to the selected Set (part/cycle).

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”).

Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to be

Enter
reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust
values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

The nominal value of the measurement must be included within the zero shift
range (section 8.2.2.4 on page 43) based on the programmed ‘field center’ value
(section 8.3.1.2 on page 46).
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
Field center: 40,000 mm (programmed value)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within a range from
39,000mm to 41,000mm.

Measure Sign Selection of measurement sign (+ = normal measurement,

− = inverted measurement).

Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling sent to gauge for starting the measuring cycle.

To program the data, proceed as follows:

highlight the field with , view the desired value (or icon) with or , then
Enter
press to confirm.

252 Passive centering – Programming Manual

10.7.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition

To select/define a measuring head access the corresponding sub-page: use to

Enter
move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press .

Measuring head sub-page

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Head Measuring head number for the selected Set (part/cycle) depending on
the application characteristics.
Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to be
Enter
reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust
values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0,00001” / 0,000001” / 0,0000001”
The possibility of changing the measure display resolution depends on the type of
application and measure range defined upon the application configuration stage
(see chapter 8.3.1.1 “Measurement viewing resolution ”, on page 46).

ABS View Selection of measure display modality (data valid only with “Zero shift”
enabled – Chapter 8.2.2, on page 41).
DISABLED: measure display in relative value
Nominal Value: measure display in absolute value with reference to the nominal
diameter.
Field Center: measure display in absolute value with reference to the field center
value.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 253

 Examples

ABS View = Nominal Value (40.0000) ABS View = Field Center

10.7.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming

Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where it is possible to select/program the type of zero shift you want.

The state of the check boxes determines the selected zero shift.

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift

modalities are OFF (modalities not active).

Zero shift internally calculated based both on the

nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Static self-learning zero shift

Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).
Modalities applicable in the following cases:
• sample part not rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth or grooved parts

254 Passive centering – Programming Manual

 Set the corresponding check box to ON (press
with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

Dynamic self learning of zero shift

Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).
Modalities applicable in the following cases:
• sample part rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth parts
• integral measurement programmed

Note: in the case of master gauge rotating, but with grooved parts, it is necessary to
use the static self-learning modality anyway.

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press
with the cursor on the corresponding field).
For each contact of the measuring head it is
possible to define its own “Zero shift” value to be
used regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.
It is possible to program in T1 and T2 a value lower/equal to the zero shift range
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
T1 = ±1000µm / T2 = ±1000µm

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 255

 Use to highlight the field T1 (Zero shift for T1) or T2 (Zero shift for T2), and then
program the zero shift values in the zero shift field (see 8.2.2, on page 41 and 8.2.2.4,
on page 43) of the measuring head used. (1)

(1) Note: Changing the value programmed for T1/T2 causes the measurement
Enter
calibration to be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to
exit without changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero
adjust values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

256 Passive centering – Programming Manual

10.7.3. Centering Over Range values
Definition of the range where a Passive Centering cycle can be performed. The
programmed values must be within the working range of the measuring head.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the overrange limits and program
the threshold values.

Overrange control enabled

Overrange control disabled

Enabling/Disabling Overrange (OVR) limits

Enter
Press to highlight the box and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).

+OVR Definition of the positive threshold beyond which the measurement is

overrange.

-OVR Definition of the negative threshold beyond which the measurement is

overrange.

To program the data, proceed as follows:

Enter
highlight the field with , view the desired valuewith or , then press
to confirm.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 257

10.7.4. Integral measurement
Function present if enabled upon the application configuration stage.

Type of integral Enter

measurement

Parameters of the integral measurement

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average (if configured)

258 Passive centering – Programming Manual

 The selection of the type of integral measurement is conditioned by the selected
“Surface Elaboration Type” (see section 10.7.5, page 260).

Surface Elaboration Type

Type of
integral -------- --------
measure
-------- --------

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: highlight the check-box and press .

With “Type of integral measurement” = access to the page of the integral

measurement parameters is disabled.

10.7.4.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not programmable
anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 259

10.7.5. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
Access to the programming of the data relevant to the type of surface processing is
enabled only if the measurement of “interrupted surfaces” was enabled upon the
application configuration stage.
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the data relevant to the measurement of interrupted surfaces

press F5 or highlight and press .

Surface elaboration
Surface elaboration type coefficient

Integral measurement type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

The programming / validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the
“Surface Elaboration Type ” selected (see the table below):
Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes

260 Passive centering – Programming Manual

 Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Surface Elaboration Type Selection of the type of workpiece based on the

surface features (interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of
the measurement processing.

Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).

“Surface Elaboration Type” = ” (smooth workpiece): the data is fixed at “1”.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated a different damping speed.

Surface elaboration coefficient

1 2 3
Damping speed
30 µm/s 15 µm/s 8 µm/s

High damping speed smaller damping

Low damping speed higher damping

The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3; the

higher the damping, the slower will be the measurement reduction.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3) causes

the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the workpiece.
The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for coefficients 2
and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 261

 Algorithm type The programmable algorithm type depends on the “Surface
elaboration coefficient” programmed.
Surface elaboration coefficient
Algorithm type
1 2 3
THRESHOLD Yes No No
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Yes Yes Yes
DERIVATE No Yes Yes

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory

Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.

HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside: it
can only run with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral
measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
Remind that there is just one digital clock signal available, so the measurement
processing with external synchronism can be performed either on the integral
measurement (see section 10.7.4 on page 258) or the surface processing.

DERIVATE – Derived memory

The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 10.7.5.1, on page 263.

Once completed the correct programming of the surface processing coefficient,

should there be a measurement instability still present, it can be limited by
programming/changing the “Surface Adjust.” parameter (see section 10.7.5.2, page
265).

Integral Measurement Type Selection of the type of integral measurement for the
period of validity of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

262 Passive centering – Programming Manual

 Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

10.7.5.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes
parameters (A)
Measure Times (B) No No No Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes

A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application

configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).
These parameters take a different meaning and value depending on the
“Surface elaboration coefficient” (1, 2, 3) programmed.

B Measure times (programmable parameters)

Surface elaboration coefficient

1 2 3
Latency Time Yes Yes = 7 ms 4 Yes = 10 ms 4
Measure Time Yes Yes Yes
4 Default values
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 263

 Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

“Surface Elaboration Type ” = workpiece with keyway

Normal keyway: program the data to “zero”.
Keyway with chamfered entry (the jump of the contact in the air is not rapid and
could be not detected, causing in this way possible problems to the correct
measurement of the workpiece): program the time upon which the contact
remains on the full section. In this case the interruption in the measurement
detection is not determined by the contact entering the keyway, but on a timing
basis.

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).
These parameters take a different value depending on the programming of the
“Surface elaboration type” and “Surface elaboration coefficient” parameters (1,
2, 3).

264 Passive centering – Programming Manual

10.7.5.2. Adjusting the surface processing
By adjusting the surface processing the filtering of the measurement bounces (that
occur when the contact comes in contact with the workpiece).
Manual operating mode.

Enter

Surface adjust value (-10 to + 10)

Numerical value of
measurement

Bargraph of measurement

Select the Part/Cycle (see section 6.3 on page 34) and bring the measuring head to
gauging position with the workpiece rotating.

1. Press to highlight the “Surface Adjust” value.

2. Press or to change the value (range ±10) until the measurement is

stable.
Enter
3. Press . When exiting the page (by pressing ) the system asks to confirm:
Enter
highlight “Yes” and press .

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 265

10.7.6. PP/IP coupling (Option)
Association of the Passive Centering measurement with an In-Process diameter
measurement (either simple or double).
To associate the sets you just have to set the same code (1 to 31, necessarily
different from 0) in all the sets to be coupled.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of “PP/IP
coupling” application data.

Example: association of Passive Centering / In-Process diameter measurement

Coupling Code code of association between the sets (1 to 31). Code “0” indicates
no association.

Act as follows for programming data:

Enter
use or to display the desired value, and then press to confirm.

266 Passive centering – Programming Manual

10.8. Length (Thickness)
This section covers programming the measurement application of a LENGTH and its
configured options.

The example screens in this section show the diameter as Part Type 1, Cycle 2 and
Head 1. This measuring cycle can be defined with different Parts/Cycles as long as
they match with the machine logic programming.
Programming is performed in Manual mode only.
Enter
Select Programming folder and press .
The User’s Password is asked (if enabled):
Enter
- type the User’s Password and press to program/modify data ( ).
Enter
If you press without having typed the User’s Password you access the data
view-only environment ( ).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 267

10.8.1. Length Menu Map
A B
Programming
Enter
Manual operating mode. Press .
Request for:
FOLDER

User’s Password (if active)

1

Programming of measurement parameters.

2
Sections 10.8.2, 10.8.3and 10.8.4
PAGES

Page relevant to: Control Points 3

Active Positioning Section 10.8.5
or
Passive Positioning
based on the application type. Surface elaboration (only
Pls. See the corresponding chapter. if the measuring function for 4
interrupted surfaces is
enabled). Section 10.8.6

Options

Direct coupling– 5
TIR
Dirac Section 10.8.7
Section 10.8.11

If any of these options are not installed, Stock Removal 6

then the icon and the corresponding page Section 10.8.8
are not seen.

Getting around the program Pulsed Feed Back 7

(section 10.8.9)
Enter
move down to the next level.

move up one level BCD Feed Back 8

(section 10.8.10)
move between folders, sub-
folders or pages on the same level.

268 Length (Thickness) – Programming Manual

10.8.1.1. Measurement optional functions (Options)
The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions.

Function keys (F6 and F3) for

measurement optional function

If there are more than two optional functions (more function keys necessary) the F6
and F3 key have dynamic management. The “scroll” icon appears within the
key, beside the associated F# key number, to indicate that there are non-displayed
function keys. Highlight the key and use the and keys to scroll the list of the
measurement optional functions (represented by the relevant icons) available. Select
the optional function by pressing the F6 or F3 function key associated to the icon of
that function.

Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the measurement optional

functions present; an optional function is active when the box to the left of the
corresponding function key is full.
Example:

TIR optional function active

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 269

10.8.2. Programming of measurement parameters
Selection/programming
of zero shift (only with Measuring head sub-page
measuring heads
enabled for “zero shift”)

Measurement equation

Head Number of the measuring head combined to the selected Set (part/cycle).

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”). (1)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within the zero shift
range (section 8.2.2.4 on page 43) based on the programmed ‘field center’ value
(section 8.3.1.2 on page 46).
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
Field center: 40,000 mm (programmed value)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within a range from
39,000mm to 41,000mm.

Master deviation The difference between the nominal value of master and the
gauged measurement of the workpiece used as such. (1)

Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling to gauge for starting the measuring cycle.

To program the data, proceed as follows:

highlight the field with , view the desired value (or icon) with or , then
Enter
press to confirm.

(1) Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to
Enter
be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust values
(programmed or from BCD) as well.

270 Length (Thickness) – Programming Manual

10.8.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition

To select/define a measuring head access the corresponding sub-page: use to

Enter
move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press .

Measuring head sub-page

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Head Measuring head number for the selected Set (part/cycle) depending on
the application characteristics.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0,00001” / 0,000001” / 0,0000001”
The possibility of changing the measure display resolution depends on the type of
application and measure range defined upon the application configuration stage
(see chapter 8.3.1.1 “Measurement viewing resolution ”, on page 46).

ABS View Selection of measure display modality (data valid only with “Zero shift”
enabled – Chapter 8.2.2, on page 41).
DISABLED: measure display in relative value
Nominal Value: measure display in absolute value with reference to the nominal
diameter.
Field Center: measure display in absolute value with reference to the field center
value.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 271

10.8.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming
Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where it is possible to select/program the type of zero shift you want.

The state of the check boxes determines the selected zero shift.

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based both on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Static self-learning zero shift

Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).

Modalities applicable in the following cases:

• sample part not rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth or grooved parts

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

272 Length (Thickness) – Programming Manual

 Dynamic self learning of zero shift
Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).
Modalities applicable in the following cases:
• sample part rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth parts
• integral measurement programmed

Note: in the case of master gauge rotating, but with grooved parts, it is necessary to
use the static self-learning modality anyway.

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press
with the cursor on the corresponding field).
For each contact of the measuring head it is
possible to define its own “Zero shift” value to be
used regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.
It is possible to program in T1 and T2 a value lower/equal to the zero shift range
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
T1 = ±1000µm / T2 = ±1000µm

Use to highlight the field T1 (Zero shift for T1) or T2 (Zero shift for T2), and then
program the zero shift values in the zero shift field (see 8.2.2, on page 41 and 8.2.2.4,
on page 43) of the measuring head used. (1)

(1) Note: Changing the value programmed for T1/T2 causes the measurement
Enter
calibration to be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or
to exit without changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the
zero adjust values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 273

10.8.3. Measurement equation

Measure Direction and sign of contacts T1 and T2 determine the length

measurement. The following possibilities are available: T1, T1+T2, T1-T2, -T1-T2,
T2-T1.

To select: highlight the field with , press to view the desired value, then
to confirm.

274 Length (Thickness) – Programming Manual

10.8.4. Integral measurement
Function present, if enabled upon the application configuration stage.

Type of integral Enter

measurement

Parameters of the integral measurement

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average (if configured)

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 275

 The selection of the type of integral measurement is conditioned by the selected
“Surface Elaboration Type” (see section 10.8.6, page 280).
Surface Elaboration Type

Type of
integral -------- --------
measure
-------- --------

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: highlight the check-box and press .

10.8.4.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not programmable
anymore.
Note: with “Type of integral measurement” = the processing requires a
minimum rotation speed during the cycle for being able to acquire the samples
required for the processing itself, so a speed of 10 RPM was adopted.
Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral
measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing).
With the check box enabled, successive measurement samples are processed so
as to display a continuous trend of the measurement itself. Thus the measurement
display is much more similar to the real trend of machining, allowing in this way a
more accurate control of the machining controls triggering and particularly of the
zero control.

276 Length (Thickness) – Programming Manual

 Example of removal estimation processing (continuous curve)
Measurement trend (display) WITH “Removal
estimation” function

Measurement trend (display) WITHOUT

“Removal estimation” function

1, 2, 3, 4, -- measurement sampling points

(1-2), (2-3), -- straight line of interpolation between the corresponding
measurement points

The measurement is not updated at each revolution of the workpiece, but

continuously: the trend of the measurement up to the successive measurement
sampling is defined based on the interpolation between two successive
measurement samples. A new interpolation between the last two samplings is
performed by defining the new measurement trend up to the next sampling, and so
on down to “zero”.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 277

10.8.5. Control Points
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of machining control points including a
zero control (the number of control points is defined at the application configuration
level).

10.8.5.1. Programming control points value

The control points are pre-programmed with a default value. The zero control cannot
be set since it concerns the final size of workpiece.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the control points programming page, press F4 or highlight

and press .

Default value of control

points

Viewing the position of

the different control
points

1. Press to highlight the control point, view the desired value with or ,
Enter
then press .
or
Enter
press to highlight the control point, then .

- press or to select the digit that needs changing and or to

display the desired value (repeat for each digit that needs to be programmed).
Enter
- press .

2. Repeat step 1 for all control points to be programmed, then press .

Note: The control points must be programmed in increasing order from “zero”;
otherwise “Error 4” is displayed when exiting programming.

278 Length (Thickness) – Programming Manual

10.8.5.2. Removing control points
To remove one or more control points act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be removed.

2. While holding down press . The control point is removed (No) and
viewing of control points position is updated based on the remaining control
points.

3. Press .
Control points
disabled

10.8.5.3. Restoring control points

To restore the control points previously removed, act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be restored

Enter
2. While holding down press . The control point is restored with the last
programmed value. If this value needs to be changed, follow the procedure to
program a control point.

3. Press .

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 279

10.8.6. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
Access to the programming of the data relevant to the type of surface processing is
enabled only if the measurement of “interrupted surfaces” was enabled upon the
application configuration stage.
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the data relevant to the measurement of interrupted surfaces

Enter
press F5 or highlight and press .

Surface elaboration type Surface elaboration

coefficient

Integral measurement type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

The programming / validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the
“Surface Elaboration Type ” selected (see the table below):
Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes

280 Length (Thickness) – Programming Manual

 Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Surface Elaboration Type Selection of the type of workpiece based on the

surface features (interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of
the measurement processing.

Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).

“Surface Elaboration Type” = ” (smooth workpiece): the data is fixed at “1”.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated with three different damping speeds; the first above control
C2, the second between controls C2 and C1, the third below control C1 (see the
table below). Should the machining controls not be used, the points of damping
variation are fixed at +150µm and +50µm (measurement values).

Machining Surface elaboration coefficient

NO controls
controls 1 2 3
Damping speeds
480 µm/s 240 µm/s 128 µm/s
C2 +150 µm
120 µm/s 60 µm/s 32 µm/s
C1 +50µm
30 µm/s 15 µm/s 8 µm/s

High damping speed smaller damping

Low damping speed higher damping
The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3; the
higher the damping, the slower will be the measurement reduction. If damping is
excessive, it might happen that during machining the wheel removes an amount of
stock higher than the gauged stock.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 281

 Therefore the damping speed shall be higher than the wheel feeding speed.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3)

causes the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the
workpiece. The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for
coefficients 2 and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

Algorithm type The programmable algorithm type depends on the “Surface

elaboration coefficient” programmed.
Surface elaboration coefficient
Algorithm type
1 2 3
THRESHOLD Yes No No
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Yes Yes Yes
DERIVATE No Yes Yes

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory

Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.

HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside: it
can only run with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral
measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
Remind that there is just one digital clock signal available, so the measurement
processing with external synchronism can be performed either on the integral
measurement (see section 10.8.4 on page 275) or the surface processing.

DERIVATE – Derived memory

The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 10.8.6.1, on page 284.

Once completed the correct programming of the surface processing coefficient,

should there be a measurement instability still present, it can be limited by
programming/changing the “Surface Adjust.” parameter (see section 10.8.6.2, page
285).

Integral Measurement Type Selection of the type of integral measurement for the
period of validity of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

282 Length (Thickness) – Programming Manual

 Instant measurement value
Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing).
With the check box enabled, the measurement damping value does not depend
anymore on the “Surface elaboration coefficient” programmed (1, 2 or 3), but is
automatically calculated at each measurement interruption (interruption of the
workpiece).
The calculated damping value automatically matches each variation in the removal
speed.
Example of removal estimation processing for measurement of grooved
workpieces

Measurement trend (display) WITH

“Estimation Removal ” function

Display of the measurement with reference to

the transducer (display without damping)

1, 2, 3 Measurement trend (display) with programmed damping, WITHOUT

“Estimation Removal ” function. The measurement is displayed based
on the damping value defined through the programming (1, 2 or 3) of
the “Surface elaboration coefficient”.
Note: programming 3 is wrong in the example proposed: the
measurement damping speed is slower than the stock removal.
Programmings 1 and 2 are correct.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 283

10.8.6.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters
The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes
parameters (A)
Measure Times (B) No No No Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes

A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application

configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).
These parameters take a different meaning and value depending on the
“Surface elaboration coefficient” (1, 2, 3) programmed.

B Measure times (programmable parameters)

Surface elaboration coefficient

1 2 3
Latency Time Yes Yes = 7 ms 4 Yes = 10 ms 4
Measure Time Yes Yes Yes
4 Default values
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.
Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).
“Surface Elaboration Type ” = workpiece with keyway
Normal keyway: program the data to “zero”.
Keyway with chamfered entry (the jump of the contact in the air is not rapid and
could be not detected, causing in this way possible problems to the correct

284 Length (Thickness) – Programming Manual

 measurement of the workpiece): program the time upon which the contact
remains on the full section. In this case the interruption in the measurement
detection is not determined by the contact entering the keyway, but on a timing
basis.

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).
These parameters take a different value depending on the programming of the
“Surface elaboration type” and “Surface elaboration coefficient” parameters (1,
2, 3).

10.8.6.2. Adjusting the surface processing

By adjusting the surface processing the filtering of the measurement bounces (that
occur when the contact comes in contact with the workpiece).
Manual operating mode.

Enter

Surface adjust value (-10 to + 10)

Numerical value of
measurement

Bargraph of measurement

Select the Part/Cycle (see section 6.3 on page 34) and bring the measuring head to
gauging position with the workpiece rotating.

1. Press to highlight the “Surface Adjust” value.

2. Press or to change the value (range ±10) until the measurement is

stable.
Enter
3. Press . When exiting the page (by pressing ) the system asks to confirm:
Enter
highlight “Yes” and press .

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 285

10.8.7. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option)
It allows determining (using just one contact – T1 or T2) the eccentricity error of the
workpiece as to the correct rotation axis.
Upon Programming the TIR option can be enabled or disabled and its characteristics
be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the TIR
measurement data.

TIR control enabled

TIR control disabled

Enabling/Disabling TIR control

Enter
Press to highlight the item “Tir” and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).

Note: The TIR check can NOT be enabled with “Surface elaboration type” =
or .

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).
TIR Transducer Contact (T1 or T2) used to carry out TIR check.
TIR Control Value beyond which the TIR measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.
Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time. The “TIR Rpm” data is not
programmable anymore.
TIR Rpm Rotation speed of the workpiece during TIR measurement.
TIR Delay Time delay before taking the TIR measurement.

286 Length (Thickness) – Programming Manual

10.8.8. Stock Removal (Option)
This option allows carrying out machining cycles in which a predetermined amount of
stock is removed, instead of reaching zero.
Upon Programming the “Stock removal” function can be enabled/disabled, and its
characteristics be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming; see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the stock
removal data.

Definition of stock removal type

Defining the type of stock removal

Enter
View the desired value using or , then press to confirm the selection:

DISABLED Stock removal function disabled (the actual stock of the

workpiece is removed).

ABSOLUTE Stock removal function enabled, with removal of a constant

amount of stock

PERCENTAGE Stock removal function enabled, with removal of a percentage

amount of stock

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 287

10.8.8.1. Removal of a constant amount of stock (ABSOLUTE)
Removal of a predetermined and constant amount of stock.

Stock Removal Amount Amount of stock to be removed (default value:

100µm).
For programming act as follows: highlight the involved field with , view the desired
Enter
value using or , then press to confirm.

Note: in case the electronic unit has been set up in order to receive the stock removal
from an external signal (BCD, Binary or Field Bus), the amount of stock to be
removed (Stock Removal Amount) cannot be programmed; the stock value is
received in Automatic mode before the cycle and concerns the selected set. Next to
the “ Stock Removal Amount” will be displayed the last stock removal value received
from the external signal.

10.8.8.2. Removal of a percentage amount of stock (PERCENTAGE)

Removal of a percentage amount of the detected stock.

Stock Removal Percentage Percentage of stock to be removed (1 to 99%).

Default value: 50%.
For programming act as follows: highlight the involved field with , view the desired
Enter
value using or , then press to confirm.

Note: in case the electronic unit has been set up in order to receive the stock removal
from an external signal (BCD, Binary or Field Bus), the percentage of stock to be
removed (Stock Removal Percentage) cannot be programmed; the stock pecentage
value is received in Automatic mode before the cycle and concerns the selected set.
Next to the “ Stock Removal Percentage” will be displayed the last stock removal
percentage value received from the external signal.

288 Length (Thickness) – Programming Manual

10.8.9. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
We call Pulsed Feedback the measurement correction through “zero” shift determined
by pulses supplied through external logic unit.
Such a shift may be both positive and negative based on the type of pulse.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Pulsed Feedback” option and
define its characteristics.

Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the
Pulsed Feedback data.

Pulsed Feedback active

Pulsed Feedback not active

Pulsed Feedback enabling/disabling

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Feedback” and press to change its status
(active/not active).

Act as follows to program the data:

use to highlight the involved field, view the desired value with or , and
Enter
then press to confirm.

Pulse Weight minimum correction value (0 to 50 µm) performed at each pulse.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 289

10.8.10. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
Correction of the In-Process measurement based on a determined Post-Process
measurement performed with Marposs gauge. The communication between the two
applications takes place through BCD/Binary interface.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “BCD Feedback” option and
define its characteristics.
Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the BCD
Feedback data.

BCD Feedback active

BCD Feedback not active

BCD Feedback enabling/disabling

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Feedback” and press to change its status
(active/not active).

Act as follows for programming:

use to highlight the involved field, view the desired value with or , and
then press to confirm.

Corr. Code request code associated with the measurement you want to correct
(combination of Post-Process measurement and the current In-Process
measurement). The default value is automatically generated when the set is
created based on the part code and cycle code.
The In-Process set that shall perform the correction based on the measurement
performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same "Correction Code"
number of the Post-Process measurement associated.

290 Length (Thickness) – Programming Manual

 Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

BCD
Feedback
The admissible "Correction code" values depend on the type of interface from
which the correction comes (interface type defined upon the configuration):
BCD interface: values between 1 and 79
Binary interface: values between 1 and 127

Interface number identification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which
the correction value comes. The maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is
fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).
The In-Process set that shall perform the correction based on the measurement
performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same "Interface Number"
of the Post-Process measurement associated.

Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

BCD
Feedback

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 291

10.8.11. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)
The Dirac application consists in the execution of the In-Process measurement of a
workpiece (typically an outside diameter) directly coupled with the Pre-Process
measurement of another workpiece (typically an inside diameter – hole).
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Dirac” option and define its
characteristics.
Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the Dirac
application data.

Dirac function active

Dirac function not active

Enabling/disabling the Dirac function

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Dirac” and press to change its status (
function active / function not active).

Act as follows to program the data:

use to highlight the involved field, or to view the desired value, then
Enter
press to confirm.

Correction Source the type of source of the correction values for the Dirac
function may be:

INTERNAL the correction comes from a set of the Post-Process type of the
same In-Process measurement CPU card that must carry out the
Dirac application.

292 Length (Thickness) – Programming Manual

 Example of "INTERNAL source"

In-Process measurement Post-Process measurement

In-Process measurement
CPU card

EXTERNAL the correction comes from a Post-Process measurement processed

in a Post-Process measurement CPU card belonging to the different
equipment.
With correction source of the EXTERNAL type it is necessary to
program the "Interface number" data as well.

Example of "EXTERNAL source"

In-Process measurement
CPU card
P7 Post-Process Measurement

P7 In-Process Measurement
Post-Process
measurement CPU card

Correction Code request code associated with the measurement on which

you want to carry out the Dirac-type correction. The default value is automatically
generated when the set is created, based on the part code and cycle code.
With INTERNAL-type "Correction source":
the admissible "Correction code" values range between 1 and 127.
the "Correction code" of the set of the In-Process type that must carry out the
Dirac correction shall be the same of the associated set of the Post-Process
type that determines the correction value.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 293

 Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process cycle Set

Dirac

With EXTERNAL-type "Correction source": the In-Process set that shall perform
the Dirac correction based on the measurement performed on a Post-Process
control plan shall have the same "Correction Code" number of the Post-Process
measurement associated.
Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

Dirac

The admissible "Correction code" values depend on the type of interface from
which the correction comes (interface type defined upon the configuration):
• BCD interface: values between 1 and 79
• Binary interface: values between 1 and 127.

Correction Sign selection of sign (+ or -) for the Dirac correction.

+ sign (default): standard Dirac application (Post-Process measurement inside
diameter / In-Process measurement outside diameter)
- sign: special Dirac application (the sign of the correction is inverted).
Example: Post-Process measurement outside diameter / In-Process
measurement inside diameter.

Interface Numberidentification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which the
Dirac correction comes (with EXTERNAL-type "Correction source" only). The
maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).

294 Length (Thickness) – Programming Manual

 The In-Process set that shall perform the Dirac correction based on the
measurement performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same
"Interface Number" of the Post-Process measurement associated.
Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

Dirac

One correction at a cycle Dirac correction used either only once (for just one
cycle) or more times (for more cycles)
Dirac correction used for an In-Process cycle only
Dirac correction used for more In-Process cycles

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 295

10.9. Check of flat surfaces - EXAR
This section covers programming the EXAR measurement application (check of flat
surfaces) and its configured options.

This measuring cycle can be defined with sets (Parts/Cycles) as long as they match
with the machine logic programming.

Programming is performed in Manual mode only.

Enter
Select Programming folder and press .
The User’s Password is asked (if enabled):
Enter
- type the User’s Password and press to program/modify data ( ).
Enter
If you press without having typed the User’s Password you access the data
view-only environment ( ).

296 Check of flat surfaces - EXAR – Programming Manual

10.9.1. Exar Menu Map

A B
Programming
Enter
Manual operating mode. Press .
FOLDER

Request for:
User’s Password (if active) 1
PAGES

Programming of measurement parameters.

2
Sections 10.9.2 , 10.9.3 and 10.9.4.

Control points 3
Section 10.9.5
Options

4
Direct coupling Stock Removal
Section 10.9.9 Section 10.9.6

Pulsed Feed Back 5

If any of these options are not installed, Section 10.9.7
then the icon and the corresponding page
are not seen.

BCD Feed Back 6

Section 10.9.8

Getting around the program

Enter
move down to the next level.

move up one level

move between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 297

10.9.1.1. Measurement Options
The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions.

Function keys (F6 and F3) for

measurement optional function

If there are more than two optional functions (more function keys necessary) the F6
and F3 key have dynamic management. The “scroll” icon appears within the
key, beside the associated F# key number, to indicate that there are non-displayed
function keys. Highlight the key and use the and keys to scroll the list of the
measurement optional functions (represented by the relevant icons) available. Select
the optional function by pressing the F6 or F3 function key associated to the icon of
that function.

Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the measurement optional

functions present; an optional function is active when the box to the left of the
corresponding function key is full.

Example: Option Stock Removal enabled.

298 Check of flat surfaces - EXAR – Programming Manual

10.9.2. Programming of measurement parameters
Selection/programming
of zero shift (only with Measuring head sub-page
measuring heads
enabled for “zero shift”)

Head Number of the measuring head combined to the selected Set (part/cycle).

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”). (1)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within the zero shift
range (section 8.2.2.4 on page 43) based on the programmed ‘field center’ value
(section 8.3.1.2 on page 46).
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
Field center: 40,000 mm (programmed value)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within a range from
39,000mm to 41,000mm.

Master deviation The difference between the nominal value of master and the
gauged measurement of the workpiece used as such. (1)

Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling to P7 for starting the measuring cycle.

To program the data, proceed as follows:

highlight the field with , view the desired value (or icon) with or , then
press to confirm.

(1) Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to
Enter
be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust
values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 299

10.9.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition

To select/define a measuring head access the corresponding sub-page: use to

Enter
move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press .

Measuring head sub-page

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Head Measuring head number for the selected Set (part/cycle) depending on
the application characteristics.
Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to be
Enter
reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust
values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0,00001” / 0,000001” / 0,0000001”
The possibility of changing the measure display resolution depends on the type of
application and measure range defined upon the application configuration stage
(see chapter 8.3.1.1 “Measurement viewing resolution “, on page 46).

ABS View Selection of measure display modality (data valid only with “Zero shift”
enabled – Chapter 8.2.2, on page 41).
DISABLED: measure display in relative value
Nominal Value: measure display in absolute value with reference to the nominal
diameter.
Field Center: measure display in absolute value with reference to the field center
value.

300 Check of flat surfaces - EXAR – Programming Manual

10.9.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming
Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.
Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where it is possible to select/program the type of zero shift you want.

The state of the check boxes determines the selected zero shift.

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based both on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Static self-learning zero shift

Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).
Modalities applicable in the following cases:
• sample part not rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth or grooved parts

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 301

 Note
The modality “Static self-learning zero shift” is not always applicable in the case of
measurement on interrupted (grooved) surfaces: the electric zero-setting of the
measurement is incorrectly performed (electric zero-setting error).
In this case it is necessary to select the modality “Programmed zero shift”.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press
with the cursor on the corresponding field).
For each contact of the measuring head it is
possible to define its own “Zero shift” value to be
used regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.
It is possible to program in T1 and T2 a value lower/equal to the zero shift range
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
T1 = ±1000µm / T2 = ±1000µm

Use to highlight the field T1 (Zero shift for T1) or T2 (Zero shift for T2), and then
program the zero shift values in the zero shift field (see 8.2.2, on page 41 and 8.2.2.4,
on page 43) of the measuring head used. (1)
Note: In case of single measurement the values relevant to contact T2 are
disabled.

(1) Note: Changing the value programmed for T1/T2 causes the measurement
Enter
calibration to be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to
exit without changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero
adjust values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

302 Check of flat surfaces - EXAR – Programming Manual

10.9.3. Measurement synchronization mode programming
Programming of synchronization mode for measurement detection.

Type Type of measurement synchronization. The following options represented

by the icons are available:

Internal synchronization. The synchronism is internal and the

measurement is updated at each complete rotation/oscillation of the table;
the measurement updating rate (table rotation/oscillation speed) is
defined through the datum “Frequency”.
External synchronization. The synchronism is supplied from outside
through a logic input signal.

Frequency (with internal programming only). Table rotation/oscillation speed

for measurement updating (1 to 999 passages per minute).

To program the data, proceed as follows:

highlight the field with , view the desired value (or icon) with or , then
press to confirm.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 303

10.9.4. Measurement type programming
Function enabled only in case of application with two simultaneous measurements.

The following are available:

Max (1-2) Max1 – Max2

To select: highlight the field with , view the desired value with or , then
press to confirm.

304 Check of flat surfaces - EXAR – Programming Manual

10.9.5. Control Points
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of machining control points including a
zero control (the number of control points is defined at the application configuration
level).

10.9.5.1. Programming control points value

The control points are pre-programmed with a default value. The zero control cannot
be set since it concerns the final size of workpiece.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the control points programming page, press F4 or highlight

and press .
Default value of control
points

Viewing the position of

the different control
points

1. Press to highlight the control point, select the desired value with or
, then press .
or

press to highlight the control point, then .

- press or to select the digit that needs changing and or to

display the desired value (repeat for each digit that needs to be programmed).

- press .

2. Repeat step 1 for all control points to be programmed, then press .

Note: The control points must be programmed in increasing order from “zero”;
otherwise “Error 4” is displayed when exiting programming.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 305

10.9.5.2. Removing control points
To remove one or more control points act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be removed.

2. While holding down press . The control point is removed (No) and
viewing of control points position is updated based on the remaining control
points.

3. Press .

Control points
disabled

10.9.5.3. Restoring control points

To restore the control points previously removed, act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be restored

2. While holding down press . The control point is restored with the last
programmed value. If this value needs to be changed, follow the procedure to
program a control point.

3. Press .

306 Check of flat surfaces - EXAR – Programming Manual

10.9.6. Stock Removal (Option)
This option allows carrying out machining cycles in which a predetermined amount of
stock is removed, instead of reaching zero.
Upon Programming the “Stock removal” function can be enabled/disabled, and its
characteristics be defined.

Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming; see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the stock
removal data.

Definition of stock removal type

Defining the type of stock removal

Enter
View the desired value using or , then press to confirm the selection:

DISABLED Stock removal function disabled (the actual stock of the

workpiece is removed).

ABSOLUTE Stock removal function enabled, with removal of a constant

amount of stock

PERCENTAGE Stock removal function enabled, with removal of a percentage

amount of stock

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 307

10.9.6.1. Removal of a constant amount of stock (ABSOLUTE)
Removal of a predetermined and constant amount of stock.

Stock Removal Amount Amount of stock to be removed (default value:

100µm).
For programming act as follows: highlight the involved field with , view the
Enter
desired value using or , then press to confirm.

Note: in case the electronic unit has been set up in order to receive the stock removal
from an external signal (BCD, Binary or Field Bus), the amount of stock to be
removed (Stock Removal Amount) cannot be programmed; the stock value is
received in Automatic mode before the cycle and concerns the selected set. Next to
the “ Stock Removal Amount” will be displayed the last stock removal value received
from the external signal.

10.9.6.2. Removal of a percentage amount of stock (PERCENTAGE)

Removal of a percentage amount of the detected stock.

Stock Removal Percentage Percentage of stock to be removed (1 to 99%).

Default value: 50%.
For programming act as follows: highlight the involved field with , view the
Enter
desired value using or , then press to confirm.

Note: in case the electronic unit has been set up in order to receive the stock removal
from an external signal (BCD, Binary or Field Bus), the percentage of stock to be
removed (Stock Removal Percentage) cannot be programmed; the stock pecentage
value is received in Automatic mode before the cycle and concerns the selected set.
Next to the “ Stock Removal Percentage” will be displayed the last stock removal
percentage value received from the external signal.

308 Check of flat surfaces - EXAR – Programming Manual

10.9.7. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
We call Pulsed Feedback the measurement correction through “zero” shift determined
by pulses supplied through external logic unit.
Such a shift may be both positive and negative based on the type of pulse.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Pulsed Feedback” option and
define its characteristics.

Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the
Pulsed Feedback data.

Pulsed Feedback active

Pulsed Feedback not active

Pulsed Feedback enabling/disabling

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Feedback” and press to change its status
(active/not active).

Act as follows to program the data:

use to highlight the involved field, view the desired value with or , and
Enter
then press to confirm.

Pulse Weight minimum correction value (0 to 50 µm) performed at each pulse.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 309

10.9.8. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
Correction of the In-Process measurement based on a determined Post-Process
measurement performed with Marposs gauge. The communication between the two
applications takes place through BCD/Binary interface.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “BCD Feedback” option and
define its characteristics.
Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the BCD
Feedback data.

BCD Feedback active

BCD Feedback not active

BCD Feedback enabling/disabling

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Feedback” and press to change its status
(active/not active).

Act as follows for programming:

use to highlight the involved field, view the desired value with or , and
then press to confirm.

Corr. Code request code associated with the measurement you want to correct
(combination of Post-Process measurement and the current In-Process
measurement). The default value is automatically generated when the set is
created based on the part code and cycle code.
The In-Process set that shall perform the correction based on the measurement
performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same "Correction Code"
number of the Post-Process measurement associated.

310 Check of flat surfaces - EXAR – Programming Manual

 Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

BCD
Feedback
The admissible "Correction code" values depend on the type of interface from
which the correction comes (interface type defined upon the configuration):
BCD interface: values between 1 and 79
Binary interface: values between 1 and 127

Interface number identification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which
the correction value comes. The maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is
fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).
The In-Process set that shall perform the correction based on the measurement
performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same "Interface Number"
of the Post-Process measurement associated.

Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

BCD
Feedback

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 311

10.9.9. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)
The Dirac application consists in the execution of the In-Process measurement of a
workpiece (typically an outside diameter) directly coupled with the Pre-Process
measurement of another workpiece (typically an inside diameter – hole).
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Dirac” option and define its
characteristics.
Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the Dirac
application data.

Dirac function active

Dirac function not active

Enabling/disabling the Dirac function

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Dirac” and press to change its status (
function active / function not active).

Act as follows to program the data:

use to highlight the involved field, or to view the desired value, then
Enter
press to confirm.

Correction Source the type of source of the correction values for the Dirac
function may be:

INTERNAL the correction comes from a set of the Post-Process type of the
same In-Process measurement CPU card that must carry out the
Dirac application.

312 Check of flat surfaces - EXAR – Programming Manual

 Example of "INTERNAL source"

In-Process measurement Post-Process measurement

In-Process measurement
CPU card

EXTERNAL the correction comes from a Post-Process measurement processed

in a Post-Process measurement CPU card belonging to the different
equipment.
With correction source of the EXTERNAL type it is necessary to
program the "Interface number" data as well.

Example of "EXTERNAL source"

In-Process measurement
CPU card
P7 Post-Process Measurement

P7 In-Process Measurement
Post-Process
measurement CPU card

Correction Code request code associated with the measurement on which

you want to carry out the Dirac-type correction. The default value is automatically
generated when the set is created, based on the part code and cycle code.
With INTERNAL-type "Correction source":
the admissible "Correction code" values range between 1 and 127.
the "Correction code" of the set of the In-Process type that must carry out the
Dirac correction shall be the same of the associated set of the Post-Process
type that determines the correction value.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 313

 Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process cycle Set

Dirac

With EXTERNAL-type "Correction source": the In-Process set that shall perform
the Dirac correction based on the measurement performed on a Post-Process
control plan shall have the same "Correction Code" number of the Post-Process
measurement associated.
Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

Dirac

The admissible "Correction code" values depend on the type of interface from
which the correction comes (interface type defined upon the configuration):
• BCD interface: values between 1 and 79
• Binary interface: values between 1 and 127.

Correction Sign selection of sign (+ or -) for the Dirac correction.

+ sign (default): standard Dirac application (Post-Process measurement inside
diameter / In-Process measurement outside diameter)
- sign: special Dirac application (the sign of the correction is inverted).
Example: Post-Process measurement outside diameter / In-Process
measurement inside diameter.

Interface Numberidentification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which the
Dirac correction comes (with EXTERNAL-type "Correction source" only). The
maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).

314 Check of flat surfaces - EXAR – Programming Manual

 The In-Process set that shall perform the Dirac correction based on the
measurement performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same
"Interface Number" of the Post-Process measurement associated.
Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process control plan

Dirac

One correction at a cycle Dirac correction used either only once (for just one
cycle) or more times (for more cycles)
Dirac correction used for an In-Process cycle only
Dirac correction used for more In-Process cycles

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 315

10.10. Post Process diameter / P.P. Diameters with Switching

This section covers programming the measurement application of a POST PROCESS

SINGLE DIAMETER – internal or external – and its configured options.

Note: What is described in this section is also valid for the POST PROCESS Two
DIAMETERS WITH SWITCHING measurement application.

The example screens in this section show the diameter as Part Type 1, Cycle 1 and
Head 1. This measuring cycle can be defined with different Parts/Cycles as long as
they match with the machine logic programming.

Programming is performed in Manual mode only.

Enter
Select Programming folder and press .
The User’s Password is asked (if enabled):
Enter
- type the User’s Password and press to program/modify data ( ).
Enter
If you press without having typed the User’s Password you access the data
view-only environment ( ).

316 Post Process diameter / P.P. Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual
10.10.1. Post Process Diameter Menu Map
There are no differences on the menu map between an external (O.D.) and an
internal (I.D.) diameter.
A B
Programming
Enter
Manual operating mode. Press .
FOLDER

Request for: User’s Password (if active)

1
PAGES

Programming of measurement parameters Sections

10.10.2 and 10.10.3..
2

Getting around the program

Control points 3
Enter
Section 10.10.4
move down to the next level.

move up one level

Surface elaboration
(only if the measuring
move between folders, sub- 4
function for interrupted
folders or pages on the same level. surfaces is enabled).
Section 10.10.5
Options
5
TIR
Section 10.10.6
If any of these options are not
installed, then the icon and the
corresponding page are not seen.

Ovality 6
Section 10.10.7

Direct coupling – 7
PP/IP coupling Dirac (Section 10.10.8)
(Section 10.10.9)

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 317

10.10.1.1. Measurement optional functions (Options)
The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions.

Function keys (F6 and F3) for

measurement optional function

If there are more than two optional functions (more function keys necessary) the F6
and F3 key have dynamic management. The “scroll” icon appears within the
key, beside the associated F# key number, to indicate that there are non-displayed
function keys. Highlight the key and use the and keys to scroll the list of the
measurement optional functions (represented by the relevant icons) available. Select
the optional function by pressing the F6 or F3 function key associated to the icon of
that function.

Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the measurement optional

functions present; an optional function is active when the box to the left of the
corresponding function key is full.
Example:

TIR optional function active

318 Post Process diameter / P.P. Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual
10.10.2. Programming of measurement parameters

Selection/programming
of zero shift (only with
measuring heads Measuring head sub-page
enabled for “zero shift”)

Head Number of the measuring head combined to the selected Set (part/cycle).

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”). (1)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within the zero shift
range (section 8.2.2.4 on page 43) based on the programmed ‘field center’ value
(section 8.3.1.2 on page 46).
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
Field center: 40,000 mm (programmed value)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within a range from
39,000mm to 41,000mm.
Master deviation The difference between the nominal value of master and the
gauged measurement of the workpiece used as such. (1)
Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling to P7 for starting the measuring cycle.

To program the data, proceed as follows:

highlight the field with , view the desired value (or icon) with or , then
Enter
press to confirm.

(1) Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to
Enter
be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust values
(programmed or from BCD) as well.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 319

10.10.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition

To select/define a measuring head access the corresponding sub-page: use to

Enter
move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press .

Measuring head sub-page

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Head Measuring head number for the selected Set (part/cycle) depending on
the application characteristics.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system : 1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0,00001” / 0,000001” / 0,0000001”
The possibility of changing the measure display resolution depends on the type of
application and measure range defined upon the application configuration stage
(see chapter 8.3.1.1 “Measurement viewing resolution ”, on page 46).

ABS View Selection of measure display modality (data valid only with “Zero shift”
enabled – Chapter 8.2.2, on page 41).
DISABLED: measure display in relative value
Nominal Value: measure display in absolute value with reference to the nominal
diameter.
Field Center: measure display in absolute value with reference to the field center
value.
Examples

ABS View = Nominal Value (40.0000) ABS View = Field Center

320 Post Process diameter / P.P. Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual
10.10.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming
Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where it is possible to select/program the type of zero shift you want.

The state of the check boxes determines the selected zero shift.

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based both on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Static self-learning zero shift

Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).

Modalities applicable in the following cases:

• sample part not rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth or grooved parts

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 321

 Dynamic self learning of zero shift
Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).
Modalities applicable in the following cases:
• sample part rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth parts
• integral measurement programmed

Note: in the case of master gauge rotating, but with grooved parts, it is necessary to
use the static self-learning modality anyway.

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press
with the cursor on the corresponding field).
For each contact of the measuring head it is
possible to define its own “Zero shift” value to be
used regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.
It is possible to program in T1 and T2 a value lower/equal to the zero shift range
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
T1 = ±1000µm / T2 = ±1000µm

Use to highlight the field T1 (Zero shift for T1) or T2 (Zero shift for T2), and then
program the zero shift values in the zero shift field (see 8.2.2, on page 41 and 8.2.2.4,
on page 43) of the measuring head used. (1)

(1) Note: Changing the value programmed for T1/T2 causes the measurement
Enter
calibration to be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to
exit without changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero
adjust values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

322 Post Process diameter / P.P. Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual
10.10.3. Integral measurement
Function present, if enabled upon the application configuration stage.

Type of integral Enter

measurement

Parameters of the integral measurement

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average (if configured)
Elaboration for smooth parts in eccentric rotation (if configured).
Furthermore this elaboration is not compatible with “T.I.R.” measurement
and “Ovality” measurement (these functions must be disabled if they are
present).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 323

 The selection of the type of integral measurement is conditioned by the selected
“Surface Elaboration Type” (see section 10.10.5, page 328).

Surface Elaboration Type

Type of -------- --------

integral
measure -------- --------

-------- -------- --------

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: highlight the check-box and press .

10.10.3.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of “Ovality” measurement, if present (section 10.10.7, page
336)

4 Ovality Measurement

Enter Enter

Parameters of the integral

measurement

4 With “Type of integral measurement” = , the parameters of the integral

measurement concern just the “Ovality” measurement (if present). Should this
option be not present, access to the page of the integral measurement
parameters is disabled.

324 Post Process diameter / P.P. Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual
 Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not programmable
anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 325

10.10.4. Control Points
The gauge is configured (upon the application configuration stage) with a fixed
number of controls (up to 6). The controls can also be configured “asymmetrically by
sign”: different number of positive and negative controls, always up to six (e.g. 4
positive and 2 negative ones).

10.10.4.1. Programming control points value

It is possible to program the barriers of the controls with values between –2000 and
2000 microns; they must be consecutive and programmed with values in ascending
order from the highest negative barrier to the highest positive barrier (e.g. –50 to 100
microns). It is essential to program the barrier of the first positive control.
The barriers of the controls are preprogrammed with default values.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the control points programming page, press F4 or highlight

and press .
Value of the control
barriers

LED indicating controls

enabling (exceeding of the
Editbox for selecting the
barrier)
color of the control LEDs

1. Press to highlight the control point, select the desired value with or
Enter
, then press .
or
Enter
press to highlight the control point, then .

- press or to select the digit that needs changing and or to

display the desired value (repeat for each digit that needs to be programmed).
Enter
- press .

2. Repeat step 1 for all control points to be programmed, then press .

326 Post Process diameter / P.P. Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual
10.10.4.2. Removing control points
The controls can also be disabled asymmetrically, but maintaining the condition that
the enabled ones are consecutive.
To remove one or more control points act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be removed.

Enter
2. While holding down press . The control point is removed (No) and
viewing of control points position is updated based on the remaining control points.

3. Press . Control point disabled

10.10.4.3. Restoring control points

To restore the control points previously removed, act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be restored

Enter
2. While holding down press . The control point is restored with the last
programmed value. If this value needs to be changed, follow the procedure to
program a control point.

3. Press .

10.10.4.4. Selecting the color of the control LEDs (color display)

Editbox for selecting the

color of the control LEDs

Use to highlight the editbox for selecting the color of the corresponding LED, and
or to display the desired color, then press to confirm.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 327

10.10.5. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
Access to the programming of the data relevant to the type of surface processing is
enabled only if the measurement of “interrupted surfaces” was enabled upon the
application configuration stage.
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.

Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the data relevant to the measurement of interrupted surfaces

press F5 or highlight and press .

Surface elaboration type Surface elaboration

coefficient

Integral measurement type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

The programming / validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the
“Surface Elaboration Type ” selected (see the table below):
Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes

328 Post Process diameter / P.P. Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual
 Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Surface Elaboration Type Selection of the type of workpiece based on the

surface features (interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of
the measurement processing.
Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).

“Surface Elaboration Type” = ” (smooth workpiece): the data is fixed at “1”.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated a different damping speed.

Surface elaboration coefficient

1 2 3
Damping speed
30 µm/s 15 µm/s 8 µm/s

High damping speed smaller damping

Low damping speed higher damping

The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3; the

higher the damping, the slower will be the measurement reduction.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3)

causes the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the
workpiece. The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for
coefficients 2 and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 329

 Algorithm type The programmable algorithm type depends on the “Surface
elaboration coefficient” programmed.
Surface elaboration coefficient
Algorithm type
1 2 3
THRESHOLD Yes No No
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Yes Yes Yes
DERIVATE No Yes Yes

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory

Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.

HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside: it
can only run with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral
measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
Remind that there is just one digital clock signal available, so the measurement
processing with external synchronism can be performed either on the integral
measurement (see section 10.10.3 on page 323) or the surface processing.

DERIVATE – Derived memory

The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 10.10.5.1, on page 331.

Once completed the correct programming of the surface processing coefficient,

should there be a measurement instability still present, it can be limited by
programming/changing the “Surface Adjust.” parameter (see section 10.10.5.2, page
333).

Integral Measurement Type Selection of the type of integral measurement for the
period of validity of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

330 Post Process diameter / P.P. Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual
 Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

10.10.5.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes
parameters (A)
Measure Times (B) No No No Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes

A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application

configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).
These parameters take a different meaning and value depending on the
“Surface elaboration coefficient” (1, 2, 3) programmed.

B Measure times (programmable parameters)

Surface elaboration coefficient

1 2 3
Latency Time Yes Yes = 7 ms 4 Yes = 10 ms 4
Measure Time Yes Yes Yes
4 Default values
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 331

 Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

“Surface Elaboration Type ” = workpiece with keyway

Normal keyway: program the data to “zero”.
Keyway with chamfered entry (the jump of the contact in the air is not rapid and
could be not detected, causing in this way possible problems to the correct
measurement of the workpiece): program the time upon which the contact
remains on the full section. In this case the interruption in the measurement
detection is not determined by the contact entering the keyway, but on a timing
basis.

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).
These parameters take a different value depending on the programming of the
“Surface elaboration type” and “Surface elaboration coefficient” parameters (1,
2, 3).

332 Post Process diameter / P.P. Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual
10.10.5.2. Adjusting the surface processing
By adjusting the surface processing the filtering of the measurement bounces (that
occur when the contact comes in contact with the workpiece).
Manual operating mode.

Enter

Surface adjust value (-10 to + 10)

Numerical value of measurement

Bargraph of measurement

Select the Part/Cycle (see section 6.3 on page 34) and bring the measuring head to
gauging position with the workpiece rotating.

1. Press to highlight the “Surface Adjust” value.

2. Press or to change the value (range ±10) until the measurement is

stable.
Enter
3. Press . When exiting the page (by pressing ) the system asks to confirm:
Enter
highlight “Yes” and press .

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 333

10.10.6. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option)
It allows determining (using just one contact – T1) the eccentricity error of the
workpiece as to the correct rotation axis.
Upon Programming the TIR option can be enabled or disabled and its characteristics
be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the TIR
measurement data.
TIR control enabled

TIR control disabled

Enabling/Disabling TIR control

Enter
Press to highlight the item “Tir” and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).

Note: The TIR check can NOT be enabled with “Surface elaboration type” =
or .

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

TIR control Value beyond which the T.I.R. measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The “TIR Rpm” data is not programmable anymore.

334 Post Process diameter / P.P. Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual
 TIR RPM Rotation speed of the workpiece during T.I.R. measurement.

TIR delay Time delay before taking the T.I.R. measurement.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 335

10.10.7. Ovality (Option)
Check of workpiece ovality.
Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).
Upon Programming the Ovality option can be enabled or disabled and its
characteristics be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the
ovality measurement data.

Ovality control enabled

Ovality control disabled

Enter

Parameters of the integral measurement

Enabling/Disabling Ovality control

Enter
Press to highlight the item “Ovality” and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).
Note: The Ovality check can NOT be enabled with “Surface elaboration type” =
or .

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

336 Post Process diameter / P.P. Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual
 Ovality Control Value beyond which the ovality measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: highlight the check-box and press .

10.10.7.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of integral measurement (section 10.10.3 “Integral
measurement”, page 323).

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not programmable
anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 337

10.10.8. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)
The Dirac application consists in the execution of the In-Process measurement of a
workpiece (typically an outside diameter) directly coupled with the Pre-Process
measurement of another workpiece (typically an inside diameter – hole).
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Dirac” option and define its
characteristics.

Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the Dirac
application data.

Dirac function active

Dirac function not active

Enabling/disabling the Dirac function

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Dirac” and press to change its status (
function active / function not active).

Act as follows to program the data:

use to highlight the involved field, or to view the desired value, then
Enter
press to confirm.

Correction Code request code associated with the measurement on which

you want to carry out the Dirac-type correction. The default value is automatically
generated when the set is created, based on the part code and cycle code.
the admissible "Correction code" values range between 1 and 127.

338 Post Process diameter / P.P. Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual
 the "Correction code" of the set of the Post-Process type shall be the same of
associated In-Process type the that must carry out the Dirac correction

Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process cycle Set

Dirac

Clearance parameter of coupling between In-Process measurement and

Post-Process measurement. The programmed value is algebraically added to the
measurement and is ignored during zero-setting.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 339

10.10.9. PP/IP coupling (Option)
Association of the Post-Process measurement with an In-Process diameter
measurement (either simple or double)
To associate the sets you just have to set the same code (1 to 31, necessarily
different from 0) in all the sets to be coupled.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of “PP/IP
coupling” application data.

Example: association of Post-Process diameter / In-Process diameter measurement

Coupling Code code of association between the sets (1 to 31). Code “0” indicates
no association.

Act as follows to program the data:

Enter
use or to view the desired value, then press to confirm.

340 Post Process diameter / P.P. Diameters with Switching – Programming Manual
10.11. Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously
This section covers programming the measurement application of TWO POST-
PROCESS DIAMETERS SIMULTANEOUSLY (Diameter 1 and Diameter 2) and its configured
options.

Note: What is described in this section is also valid for the SINGLE POST-PROCESS
DIAMETER measurement application.

The example screens in this section show the single diameter cycle as Part Type 1,
Cycle 1, and the two diameters simultaneously cycle as Part 1 and Cycle 2.

In the rest of the chapter the example screens will be the ones of the pages relevant
to Diameter 1; the pages relevant to Diameter 2 are identical.

This measuring cycle can be defined with different Parts/Cycles as long as they
match with the machine logic programming.

Programming is performed in Manual mode only.

Enter
Select Programming folder and press .
The User’s Password is asked (if enabled):
Enter
- type the User’s Password and press to program/modify data ( ).
Enter
If you press without having typed the User’s Password you access the data
view-only environment ( ).

Note: The parameters relevant to the TWO DIAMETERS SIMULTANEOUSLY

measurement application is independent for Diameter 1 and Diameter 2.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 341

10.11.1. Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously Menu Map
A B C
Programming
Request for: Manual operating mode.
User’s Password (if active) Enter
Press .
1

Two Diameters Simultaneously

Single Diameter Diameter 1 Diameter 2

2

Parameters/measurement options programming.

Programming is independent for Single Diameter, Diameter 1 and Diameter 2.
The programming pages are identical, only the icon of the page identifying the measurement type is 3
different.

Surface elaboration Control points

(only if the measuring Section 10.11.4
4
function for interrupted
surfaces is enabled).
Section 0

Options

5
TIR Ovality
Section 10.11.6 Section 10.11.7

Direct coupling – 6
Dirac PP/IP coupling
(Section 10.11.8) (Section 10.11.9)

If any of these options are not installed, then the icon and the corresponding page are not seen.

342 Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

 Getting around the program
Enter
move down to the next level.

move up one level

move between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level.

10.11.1.1. Measurement optional functions (Options)

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions.

Function keys (F6 and F3) for

measurement optional function

If there are more than two optional functions (more function keys necessary) the F6
and F3 key have dynamic management. The “scroll” icon appears within the
key, beside the associated F# key number, to indicate that there are non-displayed
function keys. Highlight the key and use the and keys to scroll the list of the
measurement optional functions (represented by the relevant icons) available. Select
the optional function by pressing the F6 or F3 function key associated to the icon of
that function.

Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the measurement optional

functions present; an optional function is active when the box to the left of the
corresponding function key is full.
Example:

TIR optional function active

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 343

10.11.2. Programming of measurement parameters
Identical programming pages independent for each measurtement are available, only
the icon of the page identifying the measurement type is different: below there is the
page relevant to Diameter 1.

Selection/programming Measuring head sub-page

of zero shift (only with
measuring heads
enabled for “zero shift”)

Head Number of the measuring head combined to the selected Set (part/cycle).

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”). (1)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within the zero shift
range (section 8.2.2.4 on page 43) based on the programmed ‘field center’ value
(section 8.3.1.2 on page 46).
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
Field center: 40,000 mm (programmed value)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within a range from
39,000mm to 41,000mm.
Master deviation The difference between the nominal value of master and the
gauged measurement of the workpiece used as such. (1)
Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling to gauge for starting the measuring cycle. The
delay value is the same for Diameter 1 and Diameter 2.

To program the data, act as follows:

highlight the field with , view the desired value (or icon) with or and
press to confirm.

(1) Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to
Enter
be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust values
(programmed or from BCD) as well.

344 Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

10.11.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition

To select/define a measuring head access the corresponding sub-page: use to

Enter
move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press .

Measuring head sub-page

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Head Measuring head number for the selected Set (part/cycle) depending on
the application characteristics.
Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to be
Enter
reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust
values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0,00001” / 0,000001” / 0,0000001”
The possibility of changing the measure display resolution depends on the type of
application and measure range defined upon the application configuration stage
(see chapter 8.3.1.1 “Measurement viewing resolution ”, on page 46).

ABS View Selection of measure display modality (data valid only with “Zero shift”
enabled – Chapter 8.2.2, on page 41).
DISABLED: measure display in relative value
Nominal Value: measure display in absolute value with reference to the nominal
diameter.
Field Center: measure display in absolute value with reference to the field center
value.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 345

 Examples

ABS View = Nominal Value (40.0000) ABS View = Field Center

10.11.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming

Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where it is possible to select/program the type of zero shift you want.

The state of the check boxes determines the selected zero shift.

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based both on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Static self-learning zero shift

Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).

Modalities applicable in the following cases:

• sample part not rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth or grooved parts

346 Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

 Set the corresponding check box to ON (press
with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

Dynamic self learning of zero shift

Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).
Modalities applicable in the following cases:
• sample part rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth parts
• integral measurement programmed

Note: in the case of master gauge rotating, but with grooved parts, it is necessary to
use the static self-learning modality anyway.

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press
with the cursor on the corresponding field).
For each contact of the measuring head it is
possible to define its own “Zero shift” value to be
used regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.
It is possible to program in T1 and T2 a value lower/equal to the zero shift range
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
T1 = ±1000µm / T2 = ±1000µm

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 347

 Use to highlight the field T1 (Zero shift for T1) or T2 (Zero shift for T2), and then
program the zero shift values in the zero shift field (see 8.2.2, on page 41 and 8.2.2.4,
on page 43) of the measuring head used. (1)

(1) Note: Changing the value programmed for T1/T2 causes the measurement
Enter
calibration to be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to
exit without changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero
adjust values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

348 Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

10.11.3. Integral measurement
Function present, if enabled upon the application configuration stage.

Type of integral Enter

measurement

Parameters of the integral measurement

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average (if configured)

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 349

 The selection of the type of integral measurement is conditioned by the selected
“Surface Elaboration Type” (see section 0, page 353).

Surface Elaboration Type

Type of
integral -------- --------
measure
-------- --------

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: highlight the check-box and press .

10.11.3.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of “Ovality” measurement, if present (section 10.11.7, page
361)

4 Ovality Measurement

Enter Enter

Parameters of the integral

measurement

4 With “Type of integral measurement” = , the parameters of the integral

measurement concern just the “Ovality” measurement (if present). Should this
option be not present, access to the page of the integral measurement
parameters is disabled.

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).

350 Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

 With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not programmable
anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 351

10.11.4. Control Points
The gauge is configured (upon the application configuration stage) with a fixed
number of controls (up to 6). The controls can also be configured “asymmetrically by
sign”: different number of positive and negative controls, always up to six (e.g. 4
positive and 2 negative ones).

10.11.4.1. Programming control points value

It is possible to program the barriers of the controls with values between –2000 and
2000 microns; they must be consecutive and programmed with values in ascending
order from the highest negative barrier to the highest positive barrier (e.g. –50 to 100
microns). It is essential to program the barrier of the first positive control.
The barriers of the controls are preprogrammed with default values.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the control points programming page, press F4 or highlight

and press .
Value of the control
barriers

LED indicating controls

enabling (exceeding of the
Editbox for selecting the
barrier)
color of the control LEDs

1. Press to highlight the control point, select the desired value with or
, then press .
or

press to highlight the control point, then .

- press or to select the digit that needs changing and or to

display the desired value (repeat for each digit that needs to be programmed).

- press .

2. Repeat step 1 for all control points to be programmed, then press .

352 Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

10.11.4.2. Removing control points
The controls can also be disabled asymmetrically, but maintaining the condition that
the enabled ones are consecutive.
To remove one or more control points act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be removed.

2. While holding down press . The control point is removed (No) and
viewing of control points position is updated based on the remaining control
points.

3. Press .
Control points disabled

10.11.4.3. Restoring control points

To restore the control points previously removed, act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be restored

2. While holding down press . The control point is restored with the last
programmed value. If this value needs to be changed, follow the procedure to
program a control point.

3. Press .

10.11.4.4. Selecting the color of the control LEDs (color display)

Editbox for selecting the

color of the control LEDs

Use to highlight the editbox for selecting the color of the corresponding LED, and
or to display the desired color, then press to confirm.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 353

10.11.5. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
Access to the programming of the data relevant to the type of surface processing is
enabled only if the measurement of “interrupted surfaces” was enabled upon the
application configuration stage.
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.

Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the data relevant to the measurement of interrupted surfaces

press F5 or highlight and press .

Surface elaboration
Surface elaboration type
coefficient

Integral measurement type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

The programming / validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the
“Surface Elaboration Type ” selected (see the table below):
Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes

354 Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

 Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Surface Elaboration Type Selection of the type of workpiece based on the

surface features (interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of
the measurement processing.
Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).

“Surface Elaboration Type” = ” (smooth workpiece): the data is fixed at “1”.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated a different damping speed.

Surface elaboration coefficient

1 2 3
Damping speed
30 µm/s 15 µm/s 8 µm/s

High damping speed smaller damping

Low damping speed higher damping

The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3; the

higher the damping, the slower will be the measurement reduction.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3) causes

the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the workpiece.
The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for coefficients 2
and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 355

 Algorithm type The programmable algorithm type depends on the “Surface
elaboration coefficient” programmed.
Surface elaboration coefficient
Algorithm type
1 2 3
THRESHOLD Yes No No
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Yes Yes Yes
DERIVATE No Yes Yes

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory

Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.

HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside: it
can only run with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral
measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
Remind that there is just one digital clock signal available, so the measurement
processing with external synchronism can be performed either on the integral
measurement (see section 10.11.3 on page 349) or the surface processing.

DERIVATE – Derived memory

The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 10.11.5.1, on page 357.

Once completed the correct programming of the surface processing coefficient,

should there be a measurement instability still present, it can be limited by
programming/changing the “Surface Adjust.” parameter (see section 10.11.5.2, page
359).

Integral Measurement Type Selection of the type of integral measurement for the
period of validity of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

356 Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

 Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

10.11.5.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes
parameters (A)
Measure Times (B) No No No Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes

A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application

configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).
These parameters take a different meaning and value depending on the
“Surface elaboration coefficient” (1, 2, 3) programmed.

B Measure times (programmable parameters)

Surface elaboration coefficient

1 2 3
Latency Time Yes Yes = 7 ms 4 Yes = 10 ms 4
Measure Time Yes Yes Yes
4 Default values
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 357

 Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

“Surface Elaboration Type ” = workpiece with keyway

Normal keyway: program the data to “zero”.
Keyway with chamfered entry (the jump of the contact in the air is not rapid and
could be not detected, causing in this way possible problems to the correct
measurement of the workpiece): program the time upon which the contact
remains on the full section. In this case the interruption in the measurement
detection is not determined by the contact entering the keyway, but on a timing
basis.

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).
These parameters take a different value depending on the programming of the
“Surface elaboration type” and “Surface elaboration coefficient” parameters (1,
2, 3).

358 Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

10.11.5.2. Adjusting the surface processing
By adjusting the surface processing the filtering of the measurement bounces (that
occur when the contact comes in contact with the workpiece).
Manual operating mode.

Enter

Surface adjust value (-10 to + 10)

Diameter 1 Diameter 2

Press to switch
from Diameter 1 to
Diameter 2

Measurement numerical value

Bargraph of measurement

Damping may be adjusted for both diameters and with independent values: with the
page icon highlighted, press to switch from Diameter 1 to Diameter 2 .

Select the Part/Cycle (see section 6.3 on page 34) and bring the measuring head to
gauging position with the workpiece rotating.

1. Press to access the page.

2. Press to highlight the “Surface Adjust” value.

3. Press or to change the value (range ±10) until the measurement is

stable.

4. Press . When exiting this page (by pressing ) the system asks to
confirm: highlight “Yes” and press .

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 359

10.11.6. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option)
It allows determining (using just one contact – T1) the eccentricity error of the
workpiece as to the correct rotation axis.
Upon Programming the TIR option can be enabled or disabled and its characteristics
be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the TIR
measurement data.

TIR control enabled

TIR control disabled

Enabling/Disabling TIR control

Press to highlight the item “Tir” and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).

Note: The TIR check can NOT be enabled with “Surface elaboration type” =
or .
Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).
TIR control Value beyond which the T.I.R. measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.
Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The “TIR Rpm” data is not programmable anymore.
TIR RPM Rotation speed of the workpiece during T.I.R. measurement.
TIR delay Time delay before taking the T.I.R. measurement.

360 Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

10.11.7. Ovality (Option)
Check of workpiece ovality.
Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).
Upon Programming the Ovality option can be enabled or disabled and its
characteristics be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the
ovality measurement data.

Ovality control enabled

Ovality control disabled

Enter

Parameters of the integral measurement

Enabling/Disabling Ovality control

Press to highlight the item “Ovality” and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).
Note: The Ovality check can NOT be enabled with “Surface elaboration type” =
or .

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 361

 Ovality Control Value beyond which the ovality measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: highlight the check-box and press .

10.11.7.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of integral measurement (section 10.11.3 “Integral
measurement”, page 349).

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not programmable
anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

362 Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

10.11.8. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)
The Dirac application consists in the execution of the In-Process measurement of a
workpiece (typically an outside diameter) directly coupled with the Pre-Process
measurement of another workpiece (typically an inside diameter – hole).
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Dirac” option and define its
characteristics.
Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the Dirac
application data.
Dirac function active

Dirac function not active

Enabling/disabling the Dirac function

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Dirac” and press to change its status (
function active / function not active).

Act as follows to program the data:

use to highlight the involved field, or to view the desired value, then
Enter
press to confirm.

Correction Code request code associated with the measurement on which

you want to carry out the Dirac-type correction. The default value is automatically
generated when the set is created, based on the part code and cycle code.
the admissible "Correction code" values range between 1 and 127.
the "Correction code" of the set of the Post-Process type shall be the same of
associated In-Process type the that must carry out the Dirac correction

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 363

 Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process cycle Set

Dirac

Correction Mode selection of the Post-Process measurement value to be

used for the Dirac function

SINGLE Value of the single measurement (A or B) of the double cycle

MAX (A, B) Maximum measurement value between the two measurements
(A and B) of the double cycle
MIN (A, B) Minimum measurement value between the two measurements (A
and B) of the double cycle
MEAN (A, B) Mean measurement value between the two measurements (A
and B) of the double cycle

Clearance parameter of coupling between In-Process measurement and

Post-Process measurement. The programmed value is algebraically added to the
measurement and is ignored during zero-setting.

364 Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously – Programming Manual

10.11.9. PP/IP coupling (Option)
Association of the Post-Process diameter measurement with an In-Process diameter
measurement (either simple or double)
To associate the sets you just have to set the same code (1 to 31, necessarily
different from 0) in all the sets to be coupled.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of “PP/IP
coupling” application data.

Example: association of Post-Process diameter / In-Process diameter measurement

Coupling Code code of association between the sets (1 to 31). Code “0” indicates
no association.

Act as follows to program the data:

Enter
use or to view the desired value, then press to confirm.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 365

10.12. Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper
This section covers programming the measurement application of TWO POST-
PROCESS DIAMETERS AND TAPER (Diameter 1 and Diameter 2) and its configured
options.

Note: What is described in this section is also valid for the SINGLE POST-PROCESS
DIAMETER measurement application.

The example screens in this section show the single diameter cycle as Part Type 1,
Cycle 1, and the two diameters simultaneously cycle as Part 1 and Cycle 2.

In the rest of the chapter the example screens will be the ones of the pages relevant
to Diameter 1; the pages relevant to Diameter 2 are identical.

This measuring cycle can be defined with different Parts/Cycles as long as they
match with the machine logic programming.

Programming is performed in Manual mode only.

Enter
Select Programming folder and press .
The User’s Password is asked (if enabled):
Enter
- type the User’s Password and press to program/modify data ( ).
Enter
If you press without having typed the User’s Password you access the data
view-only environment ( ).

Note: The parameters relevant to the TWO DIAMETERS & TAPER measurement
application is independent for Diameter 1 and Diameter 2.

366 Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.12.1. Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper Menu Map
A B C D
Programming
Request for: Manual operating mode.
User’s Password (if
Enter
active)
Press .
1

Two Diameters & Taper

Use key to select:

Single Diameter Diameter 1 Diameter 2 Taper

2

Parameters/measurement options programming.

Programming is independent for Single Diameter, Diameter 1 and Diameter 2.
The programming pages are identical, only the icon of the page identifying the measurement type is 3
different.

Surface elaboration
(only if the measuring Control points 4
function for interrupted Section 10.12.5
surfaces is enabled).
Section 0

Options

5
TIR Ovality
Section 10.12.7 Section 10.12.8

Accoppiamento 6
diretto – Dirac PP/IP coupling
Section 10.12.9 (Section 10.12.10)

If any of these options are not installed, then the icon and the corresponding page are not seen.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 367

 Getting around the program
Enter
move down to the next level.

move up one level

move between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level.

10.12.1.1. Measurement optional functions (Options)

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions.

Function keys (F6 and F3) for

measurement optional function

If there are more than two optional functions (more function keys necessary) the F6
and F3 key have dynamic management. The “scroll” icon appears within the
key, beside the associated F# key number, to indicate that there are non-displayed
function keys. Highlight the key and use the and keys to scroll the list of the
measurement optional functions (represented by the relevant icons) available. Select
the optional function by pressing the F6 or F3 function key associated to the icon of
that function.

Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the measurement optional

functions present; an optional function is active when the box to the left of the
corresponding function key is full.
Example:

TIR optional function active

368 Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.12.2. Programming of measurement parameters
Identical programming pages independent for each measurtement are available, only
the icon of the page identifying the measurement type is different: below there is the
page relevant to Diameter 1.

Selection/programming Measuring head sub-page

of zero shift (only with
measuring heads
enabled for “zero shift”)

Head Number of the measuring head combined to the selected Set (part/cycle).

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”). (1)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within the zero shift
range (section 8.2.2.4 on page 43) based on the programmed ‘field center’ value
(section 8.3.1.2 on page 46).
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
Field center: 40,000 mm (programmed value)
The nominal value of the measurement must be included within a range from
39,000mm to 41,000mm.
Master deviation The difference between the nominal value of master and the
gauged measurement of the workpiece used as such. (1)
Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling to gauge for starting the measuring cycle. The
delay value is the same for Diameter 1 and Diameter 2.

To program the data, act as follows:

highlight the field with , view the desired value (or icon) with or and
press to confirm.

(1) Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to
Enter
be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust values
(programmed or from BCD) as well.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 369

10.12.2.1. Measuring head selection/definition

To select/define a measuring head access the corresponding sub-page: use to

Enter
move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press .

Measuring head sub-page

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Head Measuring head number for the selected Set (part/cycle) depending on
the application characteristics.
Note: Changing the programmed datum causes the measurement calibration to be
Enter
reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to exit without
changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero adjust
values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0,00001” / 0,000001” / 0,0000001”
The possibility of changing the measure display resolution depends on the type of
application and measure range defined upon the application configuration stage
(see chapter 8.3.1.1 “Measurement viewing resolution ”, on page 46).

ABS View Selection of measure display modality (data valid only with “Zero shift”
enabled – Chapter 8.2.2, on page 41).
DISABLED: measure display in relative value
Nominal Value: measure display in absolute value with reference to the nominal
diameter.
Field Center: measure display in absolute value with reference to the field center
value.

370 Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

 Examples

ABS View = Nominal Value (40.0000) ABS View = Field Center

10.12.2.2. Zero shift selection/programming

Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.
Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where it is possible to select/program the type of zero shift you want.

The state of the check boxes determines the selected zero shift.

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based both on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.
Static self-learning zero shift
Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).
Modalities applicable in the following cases:
• sample part not rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth or grooved parts

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 371

 Dynamic self learning of zero shift
Note: this modality is not available in applications with measure card with DSP
(linearization of the measure range / “Masterless” application).
Modalities applicable in the following cases:
• sample part rotating
• surface elaboration type programmed for smooth parts
• integral measurement programmed

Note: in the case of master gauge rotating, but with grooved parts, it is necessary to
use the static self-learning modality anyway.

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press

with the cursor on the corresponding field):
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON (press
with the cursor on the corresponding field).
For each contact of the measuring head it is
possible to define its own “Zero shift” value to be
used regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.
It is possible to program in T1 and T2 a value lower/equal to the zero shift range
Example:
Zero shift range: ±1000µm (application data)
T1 = ±1000µm / T2 = ±1000µm

Use to highlight the field T1 (Zero shift for T1) or T2 (Zero shift for T2), and then
program the zero shift values in the zero shift field (see 8.2.2, on page 41 and 8.2.2.4,
on page 43) of the measuring head used. (1)

(1) Note: Changing the value programmed for T1/T2 causes the measurement
Enter
calibration to be reset (a warning message appears: press to confirm or to
exit without changing the value). Resetting the calibration implies deleting the zero
adjust values (programmed or from BCD) as well.

372 Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.12.3. Integral measurement
Function present, if enabled upon the application configuration stage.

Type of integral Enter

measurement

Parameters of the integral measurement

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average (if configured)

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 373

 The selection of the type of integral measurement is conditioned by the selected
“Surface Elaboration Type” (see section 0, page 379).

Surface Elaboration Type

Type of
integral -------- --------
measure
-------- --------

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: highlight the check-box and press .

10.12.3.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of “Ovality” measurement, if present (section 10.12.8, page
387)

4 Ovality Measurement

Enter Enter

Parameters of the integral

measurement

4 With “Type of integral measurement” = , the parameters of the integral

measurement concern just the “Ovality” measurement (if present). Should this
option be not present, access to the page of the integral measurement
parameters is disabled.

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).

374 Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

 With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not programmable
anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 375

10.12.4. Taper
Check of workpiece taper. Upon Programmaing the Taper check can be enabled or
disabled and the control points value be defined.
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of taper control points, pre-programmed
with a default value.

Taper control enabled

Taper control disabled

Control points relevant to taper

measurement (default values)

Enabling/Disabling Taper control

Press to highlight the item “Taper” and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).

10.12.4.1. Programming/changing value of Taper control points

To program/change the value of Taper control points, proceed as follows:

1. Press to highlight the control point to be programmed, and or to

display the desired value, then press
or

press to highlight the control point and

- use or to select the digit that needs changing and or display

the desired value (repeat for each digit that needs to be set).

- Press to save the new value.

2. Repeat step 1 for all control points to be programmed, then press .

376 Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.12.4.2. Removing control points
To remove one or more control points act as follows:

1. Press to highlight the control point to be removed.

2. While holding down press . The control point is removed (No.

3. Press .

10.12.4.3. Restoring control points

To restore the control points previously removed, act as follows:

1. Press to highlight the control point to be restored

2. While holding down press . The control point is restored with the last
programmed value. If this value needs to be changed, follow the procedure to
program a control point.

3. Press .

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 377

10.12.5. Control Points
The gauge is configured (upon the application configuration stage) with a fixed
number of controls (up to 6). The controls can also be configured “asymmetrically by
sign”: different number of positive and negative controls, always up to six (e.g. 4
positive and 2 negative ones).

10.12.5.1. Programming control points value

It is possible to program the barriers of the controls with values between –2000 and
2000 microns; they must be consecutive and programmed with values in ascending
order from the highest negative barrier to the highest positive barrier (e.g. –50 to 100
microns). It is essential to program the barrier of the first positive control.
The barriers of the controls are preprogrammed with default values.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the control points programming page, press F4 or highlight

and press .
Value of the control
barriers

LED indicating controls

Editbox for selecting the enabling (exceeding of the
color of the control LEDs barrier)

1. Press to highlight the control point, select the desired value with or
, then press .
or

press to highlight the control point, then .

- press or to select the digit that needs changing and or to

display the desired value (repeat for each digit that needs to be programmed).

- press .

2. Repeat step 1 for all control points to be programmed, then press .

378 Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.12.5.2. Removing control points
The controls can also be disabled asymmetrically, but maintaining the condition that
the enabled ones are consecutive.
To remove one or more control points act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be removed.

2. While holding down press . The control point is removed (No) and
viewing of control points position is updated based on the remaining control
points.

3. Press .
Control points disabled

10.12.5.3. Restoring control points

To restore the control points previously removed, act as follows:

1. Press or to highlight the control point to be restored

2. While holding down press . The control point is restored with the last
programmed value. If this value needs to be changed, follow the procedure to
program a control point.

3. Press .

10.12.5.4. Selecting the color of the control LEDs (color display)

Editbox for selecting the

color of the control LEDs

Use to highlight the editbox for selecting the color of the corresponding LED, and
or to display the desired color, then press to confirm.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 379

10.12.6. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
Access to the programming of the data relevant to the type of surface processing is
enabled only if the measurement of “interrupted surfaces” was enabled upon the
application configuration stage.
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.

Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

To access the data relevant to the measurement of interrupted surfaces

press F5 or highlight and press .

Surface elaboration
Surface elaboration type coefficient

Integral measurement type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

The programming / validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the
“Surface Elaboration Type ” selected (see the table below):
Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes

380 Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

 Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

Surface Elaboration Type Selection of the type of workpiece based on the

surface features (interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of
the measurement processing.

Smooth workpiece
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the
full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).

“Surface Elaboration Type” = ” (smooth workpiece): the data is fixed at “1”.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated a different damping speed.

Surface elaboration coefficient

1 2 3
Damping speed
30 µm/s 15 µm/s 8 µm/s

High damping speed smaller damping

Low damping speed higher damping

The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3; the

higher the damping, the slower will be the measurement reduction.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3) causes

the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the workpiece.
The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for coefficients 2
and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 381

 Algorithm types The programmable algorithm type depends on the “Surface
elaboration coefficient” programmed.
Surface elaboration coefficient
Algorithm type
1 2 3
THRESHOLD Yes No No
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Yes Yes Yes
DERIVATE No Yes Yes

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory

Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.

HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside: it
can only run with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral
measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
Remind that there is just one digital clock signal available, so the measurement
processing with external synchronism can be performed either on the integral
measurement (see section 10.12.3 on page 373) or the surface processing.

DERIVATE – Derived memory

The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 10.12.6.1, on page 383.

Once completed the correct programming of the surface processing coefficient,

should there be a measurement instability still present, it can be limited by
programming/changing the “Surface Adjust.” parameter (see section 10.12.6.2, page
385).

Integral Measurement Type Selection of the type of integral measurement for the
period of validity of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

382 Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

 Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

10.12.6.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes
parameters (A)
Measure Times (B) No No No Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes

A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application

configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).
These parameters take a different meaning and value depending on the
“Surface elaboration coefficient” (1, 2, 3) programmed.

B Measure times (programmable parameters)

Surface elaboration coefficient

1 2 3
Latency Time Yes Yes = 7 ms 4 Yes = 10 ms 4
Measure Time Yes Yes Yes
4 Default values
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 383

 Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

“Surface Elaboration Type ” = workpiece with keyway

Normal keyway: program the data to “zero”.
Keyway with chamfered entry (the jump of the contact in the air is not rapid and
could be not detected, causing in this way possible problems to the correct
measurement of the workpiece): program the time upon which the contact
remains on the full section. In this case the interruption in the measurement
detection is not determined by the contact entering the keyway, but on a timing
basis.

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).
These parameters take a different value depending on the programming of the
“Surface elaboration type” and “Surface elaboration coefficient” parameters (1,
2, 3).

384 Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.12.6.2. Adjusting the surface processing
By adjusting the surface processing the filtering of the measurement bounces (that
occur when the contact comes in contact with the workpiece).
Manual operating mode.

Enter

Surface adjust value (-10 to + 10)

Diameter 1 Diameter 2

Press to switch
from Diameter 1 to
Diameter 2

Measurement numerical value

Bargraph of measurement

Damping may be adjusted for both diameters and with independent values: with the
page icon highlighted, press to switch from Diameter 1 to Diameter 2 .

Select the Part/Cycle (see section 6.3 on page 34) and bring the measuring head to
gauging position with the workpiece rotating.

1. Press to access the page.

2. Press to highlight the “Surface Adjust” value.

3. Press or to change the value (range ±10) until the measurement is

stable.

4. Press . When exiting this page (by pressing ) the system asks to
confirm: highlight “Yes” and press .

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 385

10.12.7. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option)
It allows determining (using just one contact – T1) the eccentricity error of the
workpiece as to the correct rotation axis.
Upon Programming the TIR option can be enabled or disabled and its characteristics
be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the TIR
measurement data.

TIR control enabled

TIR control disabled

Enabling/Disabling TIR control

Press to highlight the item “Tir” and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).

Note: The TIR check can NOT be enabled with “Surface elaboration type” =
or .
Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).
TIR control Value beyond which the T.I.R. measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.
Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal input
for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The “TIR Rpm” data is not programmable anymore.
TIR RPM Rotation speed of the workpiece during T.I.R. measurement.
TIR delay Time delay before taking the T.I.R. measurement.

386 Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.12.8. Ovality (Option)
Check of workpiece ovality.
Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).
Upon Programming the Ovality option can be enabled or disabled and its
characteristics be defined.
Note: Select the correct Set (part/cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the
ovality measurement data.

Ovality control enabled

Ovality control disabled

Enter

Parameters of the integral measurement

Enabling/Disabling Ovality control

Press to highlight the item “Ovality” and press to change its status
(enabled/disabled).
Note: The Ovality check can NOT be enabled with “Surface elaboration type” =
or .

Act as follows for programming data:

highlight the field of interest with , use or to display the desired value
Enter
(or icon), and then press to confirm.
Enter
highlight the check box of interest with and press to change its state (
function enabled / function not enabled).

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 387

 Ovality Control Value beyond which the ovality measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: highlight the check-box and press .

10.12.8.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of integral measurement (section 10.12.3, page 373).

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside:
running only with a suitable hardware configuration (amplifiers with digital signal
input for measurement synchronization).
With the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of
the workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking
the interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not programmable
anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

388 Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.12.9. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)
The Dirac application consists in the execution of the In-Process measurement of a
workpiece (typically an outside diameter) directly coupled with the Pre-Process
measurement of another workpiece (typically an inside diameter – hole).
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Dirac” option and define its
characteristics.
Note: Select the correct Set (Part/Cycle) before programming, see section 6.3 on
page 34.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the Dirac
application data.
Dirac function active

Dirac function not active

Enabling/disabling the Dirac function

Enter
Use to highlight the item “Dirac” and press to change its status (
function active / function not active).

Act as follows to program the data:

use to highlight the involved field, or to view the desired value, then
Enter
press to confirm.

Correction Code request code associated with the measurement on which

you want to carry out the Dirac-type correction. The default value is automatically
generated when the set is created, based on the part code and cycle code.
the admissible "Correction code" values range between 1 and 127.
the "Correction code" of the set of the Post-Process type shall be the same of
associated In-Process type the that must carry out the Dirac correction

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 389

 Example
In-Process cycle Set Post-Process cycle Set

Dirac

Correction Mode selection of the Post-Process measurement value to be

used for the Dirac function

SINGLE Value of the single measurement (A or B) of the double cycle

MAX (A, B) Maximum measurement value between the two measurements
(A and B) of the double cycle
MIN (A, B) Minimum measurement value between the two measurements (A
and B) of the double cycle
MEAN (A, B) Mean measurement value between the two measurements (A
and B) of the double cycle

Clearance parameter of coupling between In-Process measurement and Post-

Process measurement. The programmed value is algebraically added to the
measurement and is ignored during zero-setting.

390 Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

10.12.10.PP/IP coupling (Option)
Association of the Post-Process diameter measurement with an In-Process diameter
measurement (either simple or double)
To associate the sets you just have to set the same code (1 to 31, necessarily
different from 0) in all the sets to be coupled.

Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of “PP/IP
coupling” application data.

Example: association of Post-Process diameter / In-Process diameter measurement

Coupling Code code of association between the sets (1 to 31). Code “0” indicates
no association.

Act as follows to program the data:

Enter
use or to view the desired value, then press to confirm.

– Programming Manual Programming Applications 391

11. GAP & CRASH CONTROL PROGRAMMING
Hardware and software programming of characteristics of GAP and CRASH controls
carried out through a microphone (piezoelectric transducer) with two independent
control channels simultaneously enabled.
GAP control
Check of contact between wheel and workpiece: the definition of a noise threshold
allows to detect the contact between wheel and workpiece to switch from approach
speed to feed rate.
CRASH control
The definition of an appropriate noise threshold makes it possible to detect accidental
collisions of the grinding wheel.

In Manual mode, select folder Inputs & Outputs and press .

Press and then to

select the icon of GAP
Eliminator

Press

Hardware setup Software setup

Section 11.1 page 393 Section 11.2 page 397

392 Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper – Programming Manual

11.1. Hardware setup
In this section the following parameters are defined:
selection of frequency range
alarms enabling
definition of GAP control characteristics
definition of CRASH control characteristics

Selection of
frequency range

Cable alarm Microphone alarm:

enabled enabled
NOT enabled NOT enabled

GAP control area CRASH control area

Selection of Frequency Range

Selection of noise input frequency range.
The following icons indicate the three frequency ranges available:
whole frequency range (70 to 350 kHz)

low frequency range (70 to 100 kHz)

high frequency range (170 to 220 kHz)

To select, proceed as follows:

highlight the desired field with , display the desired icon with or , and
press to confirm.

Definition of frequency range

The frequency range suggested is the one with the best ratio between contact noise
and background noise.

Select the band

– Programming Manual Gap & Crash control programming 393

 - record the noise value (NOISE) displayed on the bargraph with the wheel away
from the workpiece (rest position)
- record the noise value (SIGNAL) displayed on the bargraph during the working
cycle (contact condition).

Select the band

- record NOISE and SIGNAL as indicated above.

Select the band

- record NOISE and SIGNAL as indicated above.
For each band calculate the SIGNAL/NOISE ratio.
Select the frequency range with the highest SIGNAL/NOISE ratio.

Note: If the working conditions (wheel replaced, workpiece replaced, etc.) are
changed, we suggest to verify the selection of frequency range.

Cable Alarm Enabling

Alarm of cable continuity: it is checked whether the microphone connection is not
interrupted (cut of the cable for the connection or disconnection of the microphone).

Cable alarm enabled

Cable alarm NOT enabled

To enable/disable, proceed as follows:

highlight the desired field with , then press to change its status.

Microphone Alarm Enabling

Alarm of microphone efficiency: it is checked both the microphone correct operation
and the correct interfacing between fixed sensor and revolving sensor (microphone
with contactless transmission).

Microphone alarm enabled

Microphone alarm NOT enabled

To enable/disable, proceed as follows:

highlight the desired field with , then press to change its status.

Note: When at least one of the alarm conditions previously described (cable /
microphone alarm) occur, the GAP and/or CRASH control is supplied at
output (pls. see “GAP Control Area” / “CRASH Control Area ”).

394 Hardware setup – Programming Manual

 Definition of GAP control (GAP control Area)
Programming of characteristics of the control associated with GAP control.

Definition of type of GAP control GAP control trigger enabling in

self-locked control case of Alarm (1)
NOT self-locked control control enabled
control NOT enabled

(1) This programming is possible only if at least one of the two types of alarm (cable
alarm / microphone alarm) has been enabled.

Self-locked GAP control: once the GAP signal is given at output, it becomes active
again at the following start cycle. This mode is recommended for GAP control or
wheel position control.
Not-self-locked GAP control: the control at the output is related to the programmed
noise threshold. The GAP output relay is de-energized when the detected noise
exceeds the threshold and is energized when the noise goes below the threshold.
This mode is recommended for dressing control.

To enable/disable, proceed as follows:

highlight the desired field with , then press to change its status.

definition of CRASH control (CRASH control Area)

Programming of characteristics of the control associated with CRASH control.

CRASH control trigger enabling in Definition of type of CRASH control

case of Alarm (1) self-locked control
control enabled NOT self-locked control
control NOT enabled

(1) This programming is possible only if at least one of the two types of alarm (cable
alarm / microphone alarm) has been enabled.

Self-locked CRASH control: once the CRASH control has triggered (the
corresponding relay is de-energized), to restore the initial conditions (relay
energized), disable the CRASH control and then enable it again (“CRASH enable”
input signal).

– Programming Manual Gap & Crash control programming 395

 Not-self-locked CRASH control: the control at the output is related to the
programmed noise threshold. The CRASH output relay is de-energized when the
detected noise exceeds the threshold and is energized when the noise goes below
the threshold.

To enable/disable, proceed as follows:

highlight the desired field with , then press to change its status.

396 Hardware setup – Programming Manual

11.2. Software setup
This section describes the elements for GAP and CRASH controls programming.

Noise display area

Bargraph Icon of control type

GAP control area CRASH control area

Noise display area

Noise is displayed through a bargraph, with values increasing from left to right.
Symbol V on bargraph indicates the control triggering point.
Beside the bargraph there is an icon indicating the type of control the noise displayed
refers to:

GAP control

CRASH control
Note: In case of alarm (if at least one alarm is enabled) the icon displayed in that
moment is replaced by the alarm icon that flashes.

GAP control area Status of GAP control

Start/Stop gain Gain acquisition type

automatic acquisition

Scroll bar for gain value adjustment

Key =

Key =

Status of GAP control

The status of GAP control is indicated by a LED:
LED lit: GAP control enabled
LED not lit: GAP control triggered

– Programming Manual Gap & Crash control programming 397

 Type of gain acquisition
It is possible to select two different types of gain control procedure:

automatic gain control procedure (with variable and oscillating background

noise)

fixed gain control procedure (with stable and repetitive background noise).

To select, proceed as follows:

highlight the desired field with , display the desired icon with or , and
press to confirm.

Start/Stop gain automatic acquisition

Start gain automatic acquisition (enabled only if the automatic gain control
procedure has been selected).

Stop gain automatic acquisition (the selection of gain acquisition type is

disabled).

CRASH control area

Status of CRASH control

Scroll bar for gain value adjustment

Key =

Key =

Status of CRASH control

The status of CRASH control is indicated by a LED:
LED lit: CRASH control enabled
LED not lit: CRASH control triggered

398 Software setup – Programming Manual

11.2.1. GAP control programming
The GAP cycle can be controlled with the definition of an appropriate ultrasonic limit
value. This limit must be empirically defined according to the characteristics of the
application.
At first the grinding wheel must be in rest position, normally spinning and with the
coolant off. The microphone is already mounted and connected to gauge. The noise
displayed by the bargraph, in this particular condition is the background noise which
is a basic characteristic of the application.

With the proper frequency range already selected (see 11.1 “Hardware setup ”
page 393), the value of the background noise displayed can be:
fairly stable and repetitive
variable and oscillating
Stable and repetitive background noise
1. Select the fixed gain control procedure.

2. Use to highlight the gain adjustment area and to set the gain value to
zero (scroll bar of the scale completely on the left).
GAP control LED

GAP Bargraph

Fixed gain

Scroll bar for gain value adjustment

Key = / Key =

3. Bring the wheel almost in contact with the workpiece, or with the reference pin if
the GAP control is used to check position, etc., as in normal working conditions
(wheel spinning at work speed, workpiece rotating, coolant on, etc.).

4. With the gain adjustment area highlighted, adjust the sensitivity with keys
and , bringing the noise display on bargraph slightly below the threshold V
and just before the GAP control LED switches off.
5. To verify the programming perform a few cycles and verify that the GAP control
has triggered at the right time.

– Programming Manual Gap & Crash control programming 399

 Note: If the type of wheel, workpiece, etc. is changed, it might be necessary to
reprogram the system.

Variable and oscillating background noise

1. Select the automatic (variable) gain control procedure.

2. Use to highlight the gain adjustment area and to set the gain value to
zero (scroll bar of the scale completely on the left).
GAP control LED

GAP Bargraph

Start/Stop gain
automatic acquisition

Automatic gain

Scroll bar for gain value adjustment

Key = / Key =

3. Bring the wheel almost in contact with the workpiece, or with the reference pin if
the GAP control is used to check position, etc., as in normal working conditions
(wheel spinning at work speed, workpiece rotating, coolant on, etc.).

4. Highlight and press (the icon changes meaning becoming ).

5. With the gain adjustment area highlighted, adjust the sensitivity with keys
and , bringing the noise display on bargraph slightly below the threshold V
and just before the GAP control LED switches off.

6. Highlight and press .

7. To verify the programming perform a few cycles and verify that the GAP control
has triggered at the right time.

Note: The background noise acquisition time is 300 ms from the start cycle so it
is mandatory that the grinding wheel takes more time to reach the
workpiece.

Note: If the type of wheel, workpiece, etc. is changed it may be necessary to

reprogram the system.

400 Software setup – Programming Manual

11.2.2. CRASH control programming
The CRASH control must be intended as an ALARM signal that is given when the
grinding wheel collides against the workpiece or other devices and/or parts of the
grinder due to a malfunction or to a bad programming.

Programming procedure

CRASH control LED

CRASH Bargraph

Scroll bar for gain value adjustment

Key = / Key =

1. Use to highlight the gain adjustment area and keys and to define
the sensitivity by setting the gain value approximately at the center of its range
(scroll bar of the scale in central position).
2. Simulate a few cycles and all the possible machine conditions (grinding,
workpiece loading/unloading, dressing, etc.) to identify the maximum noise
condition and adjust the sensitivity to have the noise value displayed on the
bargraph scale just below the threshold V (control triggering point).
In case the above procedure leads to the definition of a CRASH limit value with
a much lower sensitivity than in the GAP programming, to have a reliable
CRASH control it may be necessary to program the sensitivity only 10-20%
lower than for GAP control.

– Programming Manual Gap & Crash control programming 401

12. DIAGNOSTICS
An error or malfunction condition of the system or the execution of incorrect
operations is indicated by a message on display, within a dedicated window.
The messages display is structured as follows:
Message code and title
Cause that generated the alarm message
Remedy (operations required for restoring the correct operation)
The structure of the message code is as follows:
T XX Y ZZZ
T type of message (A = alarm; W = warning; E = error)
XX measure function code
00 = System
01 = In-Process
02 = Post-Process
03 = Balancer
04 = Sensor devices
Y function number
ZZZ message number

There are two modes for viewing the error or malfunction messages.

Modality 1

Example of “Warning” Example of “Error"

Act as follows to completely display the information (CAUSE / REMEDY) relevant to

the event displayed:

use to highlight the text scroll bar, then use the and keys.

Press or to exit the error display, and then act as indicated under the item
"REMEDY".

402 Software setup – Programming Manual

 Modality 2

Example of “Warning” Example of "Alarm"

?
Use key, to completely display the information (CAUSE / REMEDY) relevant to
the event displayed:
Example

? ?

Press to exit the error display, and then act as indicated under the item
"REMEDY".

– Programming Manual Diagnostics 403

12.1. Fatal errors at power-on

MESSAGE CAUSE REMEDY

Timeout on synchronization The Function CPU card, indicated by the Please call Marposs Service.
with card # message, has not been programmed by
the Master CPU card.
The Function CPU card indicated by the Please call Marposs Service.
alarm doesn’t work correctly.
The Master CPU card is not able to Please call Marposs Service.
program the Function CPU indicated by
the alarm.
Problem to the Back-panel card. Please call Marposs Service.
Fatal error on data write. The system is not able to write or read Please call Marposs Service.
the RAM Cmos memory.
Firmware version different on The CPU card indicated by the alarm, Please call Marposs Service.
card # has a firmware of different version and it
is not compatible, with the one present in
the other P7 CPU cards.
Alarm 27 The P7 unit has a failed card, not Please call Marposs Service.
Equipment configuration is recognized by the system.
not correct # Card add or taken off, from a Please call Marposs Service.
programmed HW configuration.
Text file not available or not Problem generated by a SW component Please call Marposs Service.
with correct Version. not compatible with the other ones.

!
Heavy failure of the Master CPU card. Please call Marposs Service.

Big exclamation mark on Problem to the Back-panel module that Please call Marposs Service.
the display causes the failure of the Master CPU
card.

404 Fatal errors at power-on – Programming Manual

12.2. Calling Marposs Service

When calling for Marposs service, please have available the following information:

Gauge name plate information on left side, including: serial #, model #, software
unit # (CM1xxxxxxx).
The P7ME system is identified by labels arranged as follows:
A. Label containing the hardware code no. (885xxxxxxx) and the software
package code no. (CM166xxxxx).
B. Label containing the unit code no. (model: 885YMxxxxx) and the SERIAL NO..

Example:

Alarm, error or warning number and message.

Procedure that caused the alarm, error or warning.
Measurement application (diameter, positioning, etc.).
Measuring head(s) installed.
Machine manufacturer and model.

***************************** End of Document ***************************

– Programming Manual Diagnostics 405